Upload
day-kem-quy-nhon-official
View
227
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 1/189
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF .......
Period 1: Review
Date :September 3rd, 2008
A. OBJECTIVE
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to review so
main grammar points of English
2. Knowledge: The tenses and forms of verbs, skill to make sentences …..
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UPChatting about students
Telling about yourself:
The teacher tell about her / himself
Asks the Ss tell about themselves
What did you do last summer?
Did you study any thing?
What do you thing of English?
Why?
What subjects do you like studying?
What do you like doing in future?
* Some requirement for the English subject:
Book, notebook
The number of lesson: 16, comprises of
Reading, listening, speaking, writing and
language focus
The number of test: Oral test : 2
15- minute test : 2
45 minute test : 2
Semester test : 1
Materials for the subject:Book
Notebook
Exercise book
Preparing for lesson:
Copy write text.
Doing the exercises.
My name is....
I am .... years old
I live in .... with my family.
There are ..... people in my family.
In my free time, I like.....Reading books, playing sports, chatting with
friends, playing games.....
Studied. Revise for examination.
Yes, very much.
I like it very much/ I hate it
It is very difficult, boring, interesting...............
I like English/ Math/ chemistry/ Physics...
I want to be..............doctor
bus driver
accountant
teacher
shop assistant
farmer
ListenWrite
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 2/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
II. PRESENTATION
1. Supply correct verb tenses:
The T give the sentences, then asks the Ss to
supply correct verb tenses
1. My brother (come) home late last night. He
(not get) up yet.2. While he (do) his homework, his father
(come) home.
3. He (write) a letter to his friend now.
4. Yesterday while I (do) my homework, my
sister (read) a book.
5. He (arrive) as soon as I phone him.
6. They (learn) a lot recently.
7. Before he (leave) the office last night, he
(lock) the door carefully.
8. The president just (make) a speech.9. I (have) my fence (mend) last week.
10. It (take) me two hours (finish) that exercise
last night.
What tenses are used in the exercise?
Asks the Ss to answer the T’s question
2. Supply correct verb forms:
The T give the suggestions, , then asks the Ss
to make sentences, using correct verb forms:
1. You / mind / open / window / me?
2. It / too / dark / read a book / that room.3. He / afraid / travel / air
4. Before / afford / me / buy / that car/ my
ather / write / me / a long letter.
5. He / not admit / steal / worth necklace.
6. Why / she / usually / avoid / see / his father?
. Not / let / he / know / my plan.
8. I / can not / imagine / fly / the Moon.
9. I / find it / dangerous / stay here / with him.
10. They / can not stand / see him day by day.
Let the Ss do their exercises, then asks some togo to the blackboard to write their sentences.
What forms are used in the exercise?
Why it is used?
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Speaking skill.
Verb tenses and forms.
Preparations for new lesson
Copy write the reading passage. Find new
words
Read the sentences, then supply correct verb
tenses
came / has not got
was doing / cameis writing
was doing / was reading
will arrive
have learnt
left / had locked
has just made
had / mended
took / finishing
Simple present Simple past
Simple future Present perfectPast perfect
Present continuous Past continuous
Read the given information then make
sentences, paying attention to verb form: TO
infinitive, bare infinitive, gerund ...
1. Do you mind opening the window for me?
Mind + Ving
2. It is / was too dark to read a book in that
room. Too + adj + to +V
3. He is afraid of travelling by air.Prep. + Ving4. Before affording me to by the car, my father
wrote me a long letter.
Reducing sentence
5. He did not amitted of stealing the worth
necklace.
Admit of + +ing
6. Why does she usually avoid seeing his
father?
Avoid + Ving
7. Do not let him know my plan. Let + V8. I can not imagine flying to the Moon
Imagine + Ving
9. I find it dangerous to stay here with him.
Extra object + to + V
10. They can not stand seeing him day by day.
Can not stand + Ving
Write homework
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 3/189
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF .......
Period 2: Reading
Date : September 3rd, 2008
A. OBJECTIVE
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to read abou
family’s everyday activities, guess the meaning in context and scan for specific information.
2. Knowledge: The simple present tense.
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UPWhat are their jobs?
Mary works at a school
John works on a farm
Linda works at a shop
Peter works in a bankMark works in a bus company
Bobby works in a hospital.
II. PRESENTATION
1. Before Reading:
What time do you usually get up?
have breakfast?
go to school?
What do you often do in the morning?
Afternoon? Evening?
Vocabulary:
go off (V) = ring
boil (V)
plough (V)
harrow (V)
plot of land (N)
fellow (Adj)
peasant (N) = farmer
pump (V)
transtplant (V)
content with (V) = to satisfy with
2. While you readThe T lets the Ps to listen to the tapes.
Asks the P to read the reading passages.
Task 1
Choose the best answer
Tell the requirement.
Who can answer?
Listen to the teacher and answer
doctor
bus driver
accountant
teachershop assistant
farmer
I usually get up at 5 o’clock
have breakfast at 6 o’clock.
go to school at 6.20
I often go to school / stay at home / do myhomework
The bomb went off in a crowded street.
I like boiled eggs
He has some plots of field.
The pump is working
Listen to the tapes.
Read the reading passage.
1. c 2. c 3. a 4. a
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguy
ễ n Th
ị Thanh Huy
ề n Tr
ườ ng THPT
Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 4/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 5/189
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF .......
Period 3: Speaking Date : September 3rd, 2008
A. OBJECTIVE
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to understand
important of having good schedule, have good attitude on studying for future career .2. Knowledge: The simple future tense and vocabulary in speaking about everyday activi
of students ….. B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
What subject do you study at school?
Who can write the answer?
Go to the blackboard and write them.
What time do you get up every day?
What do you do after you get up?
What time do you go to school?
Who can tell the way to telling time?
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1 The T reads the guide
Gives Example:
A: What time does Quan have a Civic
Education lesson on Monday?
B: He has it at 7.15 a.m
Or What lesson does he has at 7.15 on
Monday?
He has Civic Education lesson.
Asks the Ps to prastice in pairs.
Goes around the class to help the Ss to correctthe mistakes
Task 2
The T asks the P to look at the picture then talk
about Quan’s activities.
Notes: In the afternoon and the evening. He is
at home. What phrases are necessary?
1. Civic education 6. Liturature
2. Technology 7. History
3. Maths 8. Geography
4. Physics 9. Informatics5. Physical education 10. Biology
11. Chemistry
I get up at 5.30
I have breakfast.
I go to school at 6 o’clock.
1. Hour : minute
2. Minute … past / to …. hour
Listen to the Teacher
Read the example in pair
Practise in pairs
Ex.
A. What does Quan have on Tuesday?
B. He has Physics
Literature
Biology
Chemistry
A. What time does he have Literature?B. He has Literature at 8.05
What lesson does he have att 7.15?
He has Physics lesson
Look at the picture
Then talk about Quan’s activities.
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 6/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
get up
do homework
watch T.V
go/ cycle to stadium
play football
come backhave a bath / take a shower
have dinner
review lesson
Tense: Simple Present tense, 3rd
person (He)
Who can talk?
Have the Ss to practise telling about Quan’s
everyday activities.
Ask some Ss to tell in front of the class.
Task 3Who can talk about your daily routine?
In the morning : Get up . Prepare for school.
At school.
In the afternoon: At home . Do homework.
Housework. Entertainment
In the evening : Review lesson. Go to bed
Have the Ss to tell about their everyday
activities.
Goes around the class to have them
Ask some Ss to tell about their everyday
activities in front of the classAsk the others to listen and give commend.
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Summary:Speaking: Tell about your everyday activities Pair work
Telling about yourself* Preparing for new lesson:
Read information in listening lesson.
Study the picture
Find new words or phrases.
Practise
Tell in front of the class
At 2.00 o’clock Quan gets up after taking a
shot nap / rest. He studies his lesson / does his
homework at 2.15. He watch T.V at 16.00
Then he goes to the stadium by bicycle / hecycle to the stadium at 7.15. There he plays
football with his friends. He comes back home
at 18.30 and takes a shoew at 18.45. He has
dinner with his family at 17.00 At 20.00 he
reviews his lesson.
Prepare information to tell about your daily
activities.
Tell about your daily activities in front of the
class.
Every day I get up at 5.30. I brush my teeth
and have breakfast, then I go to school. I start
our lesson at 7.00 and I come home at 12
After having breakfast, I have a rest and get up
at 2.00. I usually do my homework for about 2hours and a half, then I help my mother do
some housework. I water the flowers and the
trees, then I have a bath . I have dinner with
my family. In the evening I watch some T.V
and I review my lesson. I usually go to bed at
10.30
Repeat the content of the lesson
Look at new lessonTake notes
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 7/189
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF .......
Period 4: Listening Date: September 3rd, 2
A. OBJECTIVE
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to listen about a d
of a labourer, decide T / F and answer the questions. 2. Knowledge: The simple future tense and vocabulary in speaking about everyday activi
of students ….. B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
The teacher writes the letters on the
blackboard.
Asks the Ss to write the jobs.
CCLOYRIEDV
NSSEGERPA
DOFO SALLT
II. PRESENTATION
1. Before you listen:
Activities 1
Ask the Ss to work in pairs.
Have them read and answer the questions
Activities 2
The T read the given words
Ask the Ss to repeat in chorus
Have them read individually.
2. While you listen
Task 1:
What is he doing in the pictures?
1. He is taking a man.
2. He is having breakfast.
3. He is taking two boys.
4. he is sleeping.
Look at the blackboard
Write correct words
CYCLO
DRIVERPASSENGERS
FOOD STALL
Practice in pairs
Ask and answer the questions.
1. Yes, I have
No, I haven’t.
2. It was two years agoWhen I visited my uncle in Ha Noi
3. Yes/ No
It is interesting
It is slow
It is expensive / cheap....
Listen and then number the pictures.
1. Picture e
2. Picture f
3. Picture a
4. Picture c
5. Picture b
6. Picture d
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 8/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
5. he is getting up.
6. He is cycling.
The teacher hear Mr. Lam talking and number
the pictures in correct order.
Task 2:Listen to the tape script again and decide
whether the statements are true or false.
Read the given sentences carefully to
understand them.
The first time
Can you decide?
The second time
Can you decide?
The third time
Can you decide?
After you listen:
Make questions and answer about Mr. Lam,
using the given words:
name / occupation / start work / passenger /
lunch/ rest
Ask the Ss to work in pairs
Have some pairs tell their answers in front ofthe class
Gives feedback and correct the mistakes.
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Summary:
Listening: Listen everyday activities of a
cyclodriver
T / F Information
Ask and answer the questions.* Preparing for new lesson:
Read information in language focus lesson.
Study the grammar note
Find new words or phrases.
Listen and answer.
Listen to the tapes
Compare the answers with friends.
Tell the answers in front of the class.
Answers:
1. F. He lives in district 5
2. T
3. F. He takes an old man from district 5 to Ds
1.
4. F. His passengers is an old man.
5. F. He has lunch in a food stall near Ben
Thanh Market.
6. F. After lunch, he parks his cycle under a
tree and takes a short rest.
Discuss about Mr. Lam
Practise in front of the class.
1. What is his name?
His name is Mr. Lam.
2. What’s his occupation?
He is a cycle driver.3. What are his first passengers?
His first passengers are an old man and two
pupils.
4. Where does he have lunch?
He usually has lunch in a food stall.
5. What does he do after lunch?
He has a rest under a tree.
Repeat the content of the lesson
Look at new lesson
Take notes
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 9/189
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF .......
Period 5: Writing Date : September 3rd, 2008
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: Through a story, help students to write about an experienced has
happened in their life.
2. Knowledge: The simple past tense to write about a narrative
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE:
Teachers Activities Students Activities
I. WARM UP
The T gives some questions.
Have you ever heard a frightening story?
Have you ever met a frightening story?
When did it happen?
Where did it happen?How did you feel then?
Can you tell about it?
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1:
Read the passage and find verbs in the past
tense.
What are the verbs?
Find the connectors of time.
What are they?Vocabulary and expressions:
stare death in the face (v)
fasten the seat belt
dip
Task 2: Group work.
Identify the events, the climax and the
conclusion of the story.
The events:
The climax:
The conclusion:
Task 3: Building up a narrative about a hotel
fire.
Listen to the T and answer the questionsYes, I have.
Yes, I have.
It happen when I was a child.
It happened at my house/ in my school.
I felt frightened / horror/ bored ………
Last summer when I was ………………
Given verbs:
started was arrived got took off
began thought announced felt were
landed realised screamed
Then
At first
* got the plane / the plane took off / hostesses
were just beginning to serve the lunch when
the plane began to shake / plane seemed to dip
/ people screamed in panic …
* We thought we had only minutes to live.
* The pilot announced everything was all right
we landed safely.
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 10/189
Teachers Activities Students Activities
Aim:
Write a story of a hotel fire, using the
given words.
Tense: The simple past tense.
The T asks the Ps to write the story.
Vocabulary:
panic (n,v) = frighten
choke (n)
(v)
fire bridgade (n) , fireman (n)
experience(n,v)
discotheque (n)
Each pupil writes the story.
Gives the writing to friend to check and correct
the mistakes.
Can you find any mistakes?
How can you correct them?
Take the writing in turns and correct them.
The teacher looks at the pupils’ writing to give
comments.
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Write the story at home after being correct by
the teacher.
They are in panic
He is choking because of the smoke
He is a fireman
He is an experienced teacher.
Last year, I spent my summer holidays at
a weekend at a seaside hotel. The hotel was
mordern and comfortable. I had a wonderful
holiday until the fire.It was Sunday evening and everybody was
sitting in the discotheque on the ground floor
It was crowded with people. They were
dancing and singing happily.Suddenly we
smelt smoke. Then black smoke began to fill in
the room. Everybody started to screamed in
panic. People ran toward the fire exits. One
door was blocked. Many people began
coughing and choking.
Then, just as we thought we had only
minutes to live, the fire bridge arrived
Firemen fought their ways into the room and
soon everyone was safely out of the building
Luckily nobody was seriously hurt. It was the
most frightening experience in my life.
Write in a paper and give to the teacher or to afriend to correct the writing.
Write the homework
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 11/189
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF .......
Period 6: Language Focus Date : September 8th, 2008
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to distinguish th
pronunciation between / i / and / i: / sound, review the use of the simple present, simple past tens
and adverbs of frequency
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE:
Teachers Activities Students Activities
I. WARM UP
The teacher gives some words and asks the
people to read them.
Sheep - Ship / i: , i/
these - thin / i: , i/
tea - slim / i: , i/key - swim / i: , i/
green - pink / i: , i/
Can you read the words?
Are they different?
II. PRESENTATION
I. Pronunciation
/ i: / and / i /
Task 1:
The teacher reads the words.
Are the words different?What is the difference?
Asks the P to read the words.
Corrects the mistakes.
Task 2: Pairwork.
The T reads the sentences.
1. Is he coming to the cinema?
2. We’ll meet the beginning of the film.
3. Is it an interesting film, Jim?
4. The bean and the meat are quite expensive.
5. He’s going to leave here for the GreenMountain.
6. Would you like to have meat, peas and
cheese?
II. Grammar and vocabulary
Exercise 1
Complete the blank in the passage.
Tense to use: present simple tense.
The T reads the verbs
Read the words, note to the difference between / i: / and / i /.
/ i : / and / i /
Listen to the T
Yes, they are.
? i: / and / i /Read the words.
/ i / : / i / :
is he
we coming
meet cinema
Jim beginning
bean film
meat it
leave interesting
green expensivepea
cheese
Listen to the teacher.
Look at the sentences in the book
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 12/189
Teachers Activities Students Activities
Asks the P to put the verbs in correct spaces:
Note: personal pronouns to use correct form of
simple present tense.
Exercise 2Adverbs of frequency
Place: Where is an adverb of frequency put?
Who can put adverb in correct place?
Have the Ss to use adverbs to put in correct
place.
Asks them to tell their answers in front of the
class.
Exercise 3
Tense to use: Simple past.Ask the Ss to repeat the use and form of simple
past tense
Form: S + V-ED (except irregular verbs )
S + DID NOT + V
(...) DID + S + V ?
Have the Ss to read the sentences and supply
correct form of the verbs in simple past tense
Goes around the class to help the Ss
Ask them to tell their answers in front of the
class.
Gives feedback and correct answers
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Pronunciation:
Distinguish the different between / i / and / i: /
Review of simple past tense
* Preparing for new lesson: Unit 2
Supply correct form of the given verbs
1. is 2. fish 3. worry 4. are
5. catch 6. am 7.catch 8. go
9. give up 10. says 11. realize 12. am
After a regular verb, before auxiliary verb.
Supply adverbs in correct spaces.
He always gets up early.
She is usually late for school.
Lan often practises speaking English.
Thao is always a hard - working student.
Repeat the use and form of simple past tenseRead the sentences and supply correct form of
the verbs in simple past tense
Tell their answers in front of the class.
Expected answers:
1. was done
2. cooked
3. were
4. smelt
5. told
6. sang
7. began
8. felt
9. put out
10. crept
11. slept
12. woke
13. was
14. leapt
15. hurried
16. found
17. wound18. flowed
Write the homework
Prepare for reading lesson in unit 2
Unit 1 A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 13/189
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Period 7: Reading Date : September
A. OBJECTIVE
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to review
some main grammar points of English
2. Knowledge: The tenses and forms of verbs, skill to make sentences …..
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
The T give some questions, the ask the Ss to
answer them
Where do you usually go to school?
How often do you go there?
Do you go to school in the morning or in the
afternoon?
In which class are you ?
Do you like your class?
Who is your best friend?
Who is your most loved teacher?
What subject do you like best?
What is the most popular topic you often talk
about?
II. PRESENTATIONReading
Before you read:
The T asks some questions, then ask the Ss
to answer them
1. Answer the questions:
When you meet your friends, which of
the following topics do you often talk about?
2. Can you tell about these things?
Problems at school:
Teachers:
Listen to the T then answer the questions.
I go to Dong Hoi High School.
I go to school every day.
In the morning.
I am in class 10A1.
Yes, I do.
My best friends are Minh and Nam.
Mr. Chien, the teacher of Maths.
I like Maths, Chemistry and Physics.
We usually talk about:
Sports and gamesentertainment
health problems
hobbies
holiday
work and study…..
Many students cheat in exams
Many students live far from school
The parents have to spend too much for
children at school.
Many students find difficulty in learning.(English)
Headmaster
Headmistress
Principle
Vice principle
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 14/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Students at school:
Subjects at school:
Kinds of school:
While you readAsks the P to listen to the teacher or the tape.
Asks the P to read the paragraphs.
Task 1
Complete the spaces individually.
The T looks at the students’ work and gives
comment.
Asks the P to say the answers
Task 2 Pair work
Look at the paragraphs and work in pairs:
Who is ……………….
Task 3Answer the questions:
1. Where does Phong study?
2. What subject does he study?
3. Why does he want to learn English?
4. What does Mr. Phuong say about her
teaching profession?
5. Why does Mr. Ha worry about his son’s
safety?
After you readThe subject you like best?
What you like or dislike doing at school?What you worry about at school?
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Reading skill: Read about school
Write about the things in after you read.
* Preparing for new lesson:
Read information in speaking lesson.
Classmates
Schoolmates
Close friends
Friendship
1. Civic education 6. Literature2. Technology 7. History
3. Maths 8. Geography
4. Physics 9. Informatics
5. Physical education 10. Biology
11. Chemistry
Kindergarten, primary school, secondary
school, high school, college, university.
1. traffic 2. biggest
3. International language
4. Crowded 5. Worry
1. Miss Phuong 6. Phong
2. Phong 7. Phong
3. Phong 8. Miss Phuong
4. Miss Phuong 9. Mr. Hong Ha
5. Phong
He studies at Chu Van An High School.
He study many subjects such as Civiceducation, Literature, Technology, History,
Maths, Geography, Physics, Informatics,
Physical education, Biology, Chemistry
Because it is an international language.
It is a hard work, but she enjoys it because
she loves working with children.
Because his son has to ride his bicycle in
narrow and crowded streets on the way to
school.
Maths, Geography, Physics, Informatics,Biology, Chemistry
Write the homework
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 15/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 16/189
Teachers Activities Students Activities
Task 3: Complete the conversation:
Practise in pairs.
Read the phrase.
Who can complete the sentences?
A: Hello, Hoa. You don’t look very happy.
……………………?
B. Hi, Nam. I feel ……………………… I‘ve got ……………………
A: Sorry to hear that.
B: Yes, that a good idea. Good bye, Nam.
A: See you later.
Asks the P to read in pairs.
Task 4
Pair work:
Make a small talk on the following topic.
1. The weather.
A. Hi, Minh. How was the weekend at thecountryside?
B. Hi, Nam. It was wonderful. I enjoyed it
very much.
A. What about the weather there?
B. It was great. It was sunny all day.
A. That sounds good. I wish I can go there
this weekend.
2. Last night program.
A. Hello, An. You look bad. What’s the
matter with you?B. Oh, I stayed up late last night?
A. Really? Why?
B. There were interesting programs.
A. What were they?
B. An interesting film and an exciting
football math.
A. Oh, Who played?
B. Chelsea VS Arsenal.
A. Great. Who played better?
B. Chelsea was. They won two to one.A. Who scored?
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Speaking skill: Tell about school talks.
What is the matter with you?
awful / tired / sick.
a cold / a headache / a backache / a
toothache.You should / had better go home and have a
rest.
Practice in pairs.
A. And who scored for Arsenal?
B. Henry did.
A. What a pity. I missed it.B. There is reported match tonight at 9p.m
3. Plan for next weekend.
A. Hi, Nam. What are you going to do next
weekend?
B. Oh, I’m going camping at the beach.
A. That sounds great. Who are you going
with?
B. With my friends, of course. Would you
like to go with us?
A. Oh, I’ d like to. Are we going to takefood?
B. Yes, We prepared some bread and fruit.
A. How about drinks?
B. We haven’t got any.
A. I will buy some mineral water and some
beer.
B. That’s OK. We’ll meet tomorrow.
B. Dgorba scored the 1
st
goal. Then Terryscored the second.
Write the homework: Make a conversation
about the topics 1 and 2
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 17/189
Unit 2 school talk
Period 9 : Listening Date : September
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: Listen to mini conservation for specific information. 2. Knowledge: Listen and make conservations about daily topics such as weather,
study at school, travelling…B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
The T asks some questions
What did you do last summer?
Did you go away?
Where did you go?
How long did you stay there?
Did you enjoy it?
What did you do?
II. PRESENTATION
Before you listen:
Look at the pictures.
Picture 1.
Where are they?
What are they talking about?
Picture 2.
Where are they?
What are they talking about?
Picture 3.
Where are they?
What are they talking about?
Listen to the T and answer the questions
I revise lessons for the exam.
Yes, after finishing the exams.
I visited my grandparents in the
countryside.I went to Ha Noi.
I spent holidays in Vung Tau.
I stayed there for a week.
Yes, I did.
I went swimming.
Went fishing.
Had sunbath.
They are at a hotel.
They are talking about the hotel.
They are talking about their journey.
They are at school.
They are talking about their school,
teachers, friends, lessons.
They are at a party.
They are talking about the food.
They are talking about music, dance…
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 18/189
Picture 4.
Where are they?
What are they talking going to do?
While you listen:
Task 1: Matching
Asks the Ps to listen and match the
conversation with the picture.
Play the tapes twice.Asks the Ps to listen for main ideas and key
words, not for specific information.
Calls some Ps to tell their answer to the
class.
Feedback and give correct answer.
Who can match the conversation with the
picture?
Task 2: Answering
Have the Ps to listen again.
Calls some Ps to tell their answer to class.Who can answer the questions?
Task 3: Conversation Completing.
The Ts has the Ps to listen again. The Ps
have to listen and complete the conversation
by filling the missing words.
Calls some Ps to tell their answer.
After you listen
Asks the Ps to tell about their problems at
school.
What problems have you met at school.
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Listening: Listen
Ask and answer the questions.
* Preparing for new lesson:
Write a conversation about your trip last
summer holidays.
They are at a beach.
They are going to play soccer.
Listen to the tapes.
Give answer.
Conversation 1 -> Picture bConversation 2 -> Picture c
Conversation 3 -> Picture d
Conversation 4 -> Picture a
Listen to the tapes. Note to the main ideas of
the conversation.
1. She takes English.2. She is in Miss Lan Phuong’s class.
3. he is at a party.
4. He stays there for week.
5. No, she doesn’t. She travels alone.
Listen to the tapes and complete the
conversation.
1. it here.
2. very nice
3. big4. comfortable
5. travelling
6. no.
7. alone
8. for a drink
I got bad marks.
I find it difficult to understand lessons.
I have difficulty learning English.
I have difficulty making friends.
I came to class late.
Write homework.
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
Unit 2 school talk
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 19/189
Period 10: Writing Date : September
A. OBJECTIVE
1. Educational aims: Have the pupils to know the way to fill some common forms,
to know the words or phrases to fill.
2. Knowledge: The way to fill a library admission form, simple application form.
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
The T gives some forms.
What are they?
What is the difference between English and
Vietnamese forms?
Have we changed the ways to make a form?
Have the Ss to listen and answer them.
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1:
Asks the Ps to work in pairs.
Have you ever had to fill a form?
In what occasions did you have to fill them?
What sorts of information do you have to
provide when you fill a form?
Task 2:The T asks the P to look at the column,
match A with B.
Then asks them to work in pairs: Ask and
answer the questions.
Asks the Ps to ask and answer the questions
in column B
Listen to the T and answer the questions
They are forms.
Write and fill.
Yes, we have.
Pair work.
Yes, I have.
Attending a club, a school, sending or
receiving money, ………..
First name, surname, age, occupation,
marital status, country of origin, Present
address, ….
1 - DWhat do you do?
I am a …………
2 - F
What’s your surname?
My surname is …………
3 - E
When were you born?
I was born on ………….
4 - G
Where were you born? I was born in ……5 - B
Where are you living at the moment?
I am living in ………
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 20/189
Read questions and answer them. Work in
pairs.
Task 3: Doing what forms ask.
Have the P to do asks:
Form ask you to do certain things.
Go around the class and helps the Ps.
Task 4: Filling in the formAsks the Ps to student the form and then fill
in it using their own information.
Call two Ps to go to the blackboard to write
their answer and comment their performance.
Correct the form.
Giving correct answer
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Writing skill:
Fill in the form, using to apply for a job, joy
a club or a course .* Preparing for new lesson:
Read information in language focus lesson.
Study the grammar note
Find new words or phrases.
6 - C
Are you married or single?
I’m married / single.
7 - A
What do you do? What’s your job?
I am a ………….
Do the asks in notebook.
NGUYỄN VĂN AN
NGUYEN VAN AN
Signature
Write correct information: I am a student
Female : v
Male : x
Sur name: Nguyen
First name: Hong Ha
Date of birth: Math 27th
, 1988
Nationality: Vietnamese
Language(s): Vietnamese, English, French
Address in your country: 20 Tran Hung Dao
Street, Dong Hoi Town
Occupation: Student
Reason for leaning English: Business /Pleasure / Exams / Others.
How many days do you want to stay at the
school? 5 hours
What date do you want to start? October
23rd
, 2006
Repeat the content of the lesson.
Write the homework
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 21/189
Unit 2 school talk
Period 11 : Language Focus Date : September
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss are able to distinguish the vowel /
/ and /a: /
Review of WH-questions and simple past tense as well asadverbs of frequency.
2. Knowledge: Pronunciation and grammar.
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
T shows some pictures and asks questions:
P1: what is this ?P2: what is this ?
II. PRESENTATION
I. Pronunciation / / and / /
Activity 1
- T calls Ss read again two words:
“cup and car”. T reads again and lets the Ss
repeat.
- explain the different between 2words (2sounds): / / and /a:/
Notes: the sound / / must put your tongue
back a little because it is a very short sound.
The sound /a:/ must put your tongue down
and back. It is a long sound.
Activity 2:Directs Ss listen and repeat the words in text
book.
Read one time and Ss repeat the words
Checks and corrects.Activity 3 Practice these sentences in text
book (page 29)
- Lets Ss read and find more words in these
sentences have vowels: / / and /a:/
Listen and answer these questions:
P1: It is a cup
P2: It is a car
- read again and repeat.
- listen and note.
-practice in individual
read these words
/ / /a:/
study far
subject farther
cousin marvelous
love target
wonderful guitar
- read the requirement.
read and do in pairs
practice in pairs
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 22/189
- checks and gives the keys:
/ / /a:/
1. love much 3. last
2. cousin lovely 4. are stars
5. sunny lunch 6. Martha
Charles
7. under 8. garden
II. GrammarExercise1 “Wh- questions” : who, what,
when, why, how... make questions for the following responses
(p-29)
Ex: 1 When did you come?
Just a few days ago.
Or: When did you see her ?
Asks the Ss to practice in group.
Goes around the class to check and help the
Ss if necessary.- check and give the keys.
Exercise 2: Fill each blank with an-ing or
To +infinitive: form of verb in brackets.
- read the letter one time and explain the
meaning of some new words.
- call Ss to read again.
- let Ss work in group (4-5 Ss)
- check and give right form of verbs.
Exercise 3: complete the following sentencesusing an-ing or To +infinitive form
of the verbs in the box.
- give an example
Ex: when I am tired, I like to watch
television. It is relaxing.
- call Ss to do.
- check and give right form.
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Do exercise 1,2,3 again.Learn by heart the new structures that just
learning.
Write the homework
Listen to the teacher
Write the examples
Practice in groups
2 -How long did you stay?
3- Who did you come with?
4- Where do you live?
5- Why do you like learning English?
6- What time is it now?
7- How many children do they have?
1- to hear 6- to pay
2- going 7- to do3- remembering 8- visiting
4- doing 9- seeing
5- worrying 10- hearing
1- to do 6- making
2- waiting 7- to call
3- having 8- to lend
4- to find 9- talking5- living 10- to post
UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 23/189
Unit 3 people ‘s background
Period 13: ReadingDate : September 27th, 2010
A. OBJECTIVES:
1. Educational aims:
Read about famous people in the world and find the way to study and live2. Knowledge: Lives of some famous people: Mary Curie.
3. Skill : Reading
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
I. Warm up
Who are they?1. A famous English scientist, born in 1462.
2. A famous British naturalist, who
developed the theory of evolution by natural
selection.
3. A famous American inventors, who
invented electric light.
4. A famous French scientist, whose father
was Polish, won two Noble Prizes.
II. presentationBefore you read:
Have you ever heard of Marie Curie?What do you know about her?
While you read:
The T give the tapesAsk the Ps to listen to the tape.Vocabulary:
general education (n) comprehension study
of all subjects and skills.brilliant: (adj) clevermature(adj) fully grownharbour the dream of (ex.) keep in mind thedream of ...
Listen amd answer:
Isaac Newton
Darwin
Edison
Marie Curie
Marie Curie was born in Poland, then shecame abroad to study at university. She wontwo Noble prizes for Chemistry and forPhysics.
Listen to the tapes
You can enter university when you getgeneral education.We can cut only mature trees in the forests.
UNIT 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 24/189
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
flying colours (ex.) leaving university with
excellent grade.
atomic weight of radium
Humanitarian wishTask 1: Matching
Ask the Ss to read the passage and match the
words or phrases in A with B
Call on some Ps to read and explain their
answer to the class.
Feedback and give correct answers
Task 2: True or False?
Have the Ps to read the reading passage
carefully and decide whether the sentences
are T or F and correct the false information,using those in the reading passage.
Call on some Ps to give their answer and
explain their answer. Correct and give
information.
Who can give the answers?
Task 3: Answering the questions:
1. She was born in Warsaw on November 7th
,
1867.
2. She was a brilliant and mature student.
After you readFind the adjective to describe M. Curie. Find
the evidence from the text to prove each of
them.
Who can find them?
1. strong willed: She harbour the dream of
scientific career, which was impossible for a
woman at that time.
2. ambitious: In spite of her difficult
situation, she worked extremely hard and
earned a degree in Physics with flying
colours.IV. homework:
Read the reading passage again, tell aboutMarie Curie .
Write the homework
Correct answers:1. c2. e3. a4. d5. b
1. T2. F. Her dream was to become a scientist.3. T4. F. She married Pierre Curie in 18955. T
3. She worked as a private tutor to savemoney for a study tour abroad.4. She was awarded a Nobel prize inChemistry for determining the atomic weightof radium.
5. No, she wasn’t. Her real joy was “easinghuman suffering”3. hard working: She worked extremely hard4. intelligent: She earned a degree in Physicswith flying colours, got two Noble Prizes.5. Humane: Her really joy was easing humansuffering.
Read the reading passage again, tell aboutMarie Curie .
UNIT 3 PEOPLE’S BACKGROUND
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 25/189
Unit 3 people ‘s background
Period 15: ListeningDate : September 27th, 2010
A. Objective:
1. Aims: Listening for specific information about Olympic Champions .
2. Knowledge: The simple past tense.
3. Skill : Listening. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about one of theOlympic Champion by using the information regarding her background and career. .
b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
d. procedure:
Teacher's Activities Students. Activities
I. Warm up
What do you know about Olympic?
Where did it start first?How often is it held?
Do you know any Olympic Champions?
Do you want to know about his / her
background?
II. presentation Before you listen
Who is the woman in the picture?
Where is she from?
Listen and repeat:
Olympic championsport teacher
teacher's diploma
love story
romantic
While you listen
Task 1:
Listen to the conversation between Bob and
Sally and decide whether they are T or F?
Ask the Ss to listen to the tapes. Play the
tapes several times (or read if there is not
tapes)
Call on the Ss to say their answer in front of
the class.
A sport international game.
In GreeceEvery 4 year.
Yes, .......
Yes, of course
She is Nellie Kim
She is from Russia
She is a five - time Olympic champion
Listen and repeat the words and phrases.
1. T
2. T
3. F I don't have much free time
4. T
5. F I want to be a sport teacher.
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 26/189
Teacher's Activities Students' Activities
Task 2
Tell the Ss to read the statements carefully
and try to guess the missing words in the
blank.
Ask the Ss to listen to the tapes and fill in theblanks.
Check the tasks and ask the Ss to tell their
answer to the whole class.
Have the Ss to listen again to check their
answers.
After you listen
The T gives guide words.
1980
local school15
family
basket ball and swimming
sport teacher
teacher diploma
Make questions and answer:
1. Who is Sally?
Where was she born?
What's her nationality?
Where did she get general education?
What's her hobby?
What books does she like reading?Why is she studying at a college?
What does she want to get?
IV. homework:
Make an interview of Sally.
Listen to the tapes carefully.
Give correct answer:
1. ........ general education ...............2. ................. lives ............. family.
3. different .................. swimming
4. love stories
5. teacher's diploma
Listen again to check their answers.
Tell about Sally's background using the
words provided.
Sally is an Olympic champion. She was born
in 1980. She got a general education at local
school and when she was 15, she joined the
Star Sport Club near her house in
Manchester, where she lives with her family.
There are 5 people in her family: her parents,
two brothers and she.., She likes many other
sports such as basketball and swimming.
Beside sports, she likes reading, too.
She likes love - stories and romantic books.
In future, she wants to be a sport teacher so
now she is studying in a college to get her
teacher's diploma.
She is an Olympic champion.
In Manchester.
English.
In local school.
Reading.
Love story and romantic books.
to become a sport teacher.To get her teacher's diploma.
Write homework
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 27/189
Unit 3 people ‘s background
Period 16: Writing
A. Objective:
1. Educational aims: Writing a C.V about people’s background.
2. Knowledge: The simple past tense.
Write a simple C.VGet to know the format, layout and essential information of a
C.V
3. Skill : Writing a simple C.V
b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
d. procedure:
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
I. Warm upWhat are their jobs?
Mr. Grey works in
Mr. Brown
Miss Green
Mrs. Martin
Mr. Taylor
Mrs. White
Miss Davids
Mrs. Clack
Mr. LootsMiss White
What are their jobs?
II. presentation
Task 1:
Asks the Ps to read about Mr. Brown
information, then use the cues to write about
him.Check the Ss writing. Asks them to read their
work.
hospital. He is a doctor.
farm. He is a farmer.
factory. She is a worker.
school. She is a teacher.
bus company. He is a driver.
bank. She is an accountant.
planes. She is an air hostess.
travel agency. She is a tourist guide.
restaurant. He is a waiteroffice. She is an officer.
What jobs do you know?
policeman
blacksmith
carpenter
businessman
engineer
soldier
Mr Brown was born on 12th
November, 1969
in Boston.
English 10 Unit 3, P.15 Writing
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 28/189
Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities
Task 2: Group work.Asks the Ss to ask and find information
about their friend’s parent to write a
paragraph about him or her.
Questions to ask:
Task 3: Write about your friend’s parent.
Name
Job.Past education
Summary:
People’s background:
Name
Date of birth
Place of birth.
Past experiences
Tenses to use: The simple past tenses.
IV. homework:
Write about Charlie Chaplin background:1889, 16th April, born in Kensington,London.1889 First appeared on stage.
He went to Kensington High School andpassed exams in English, French andMathematics. He worked in a travelagency from June 1991 to December
1998. And from 1999 to 2002 he workedas a hotel telephonist. He likes music.What is your father’s ( Your mother)name?When and where was he/ she born ?Which school did he go to?What exams did he pass?What did he do?Write about your friend’s parent.
This is Nam. He is my classmate.He lives in Dong Son with his family. Hisfather is a teacher. He was born onDecember 24th, 1965. He passed exam inRussian, Maths and physics.. He workedas a reporter from 1995 to 1998. Then hehas been a teacher in Dong Hoi HighSchool since 1999.
Lan is my friend. She lives in NamLy with her family. Her mother is a
businesswoman. She was born on March12th, 1968. She passed exams in Russian,Maths, and Literature. She has been abusinessman since 2000.
Tell the main ideas to write a C.V
1908 One of the most popular entertainersin England.
1913 Went to Hollywood. Made his firstfilm.1915 - 1925 became the most famousartist in the world1977, died in Switzerland.Write the homework
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 29/189
English 10 Unit 3, P. 15 Writing
Unit 3 people ‘s background
Period 16: Langue FocusDate of teaching: October 16th, 2006
A. Objective:
1. Educational aims: Distinguishing the sounds /e/ and / /
2. Knowledge: The past perfect tense.
Distinguishing the simple past and past perfect tense.
3. Skill : Distinguishing the simple past and past perfect tense.
b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
d. procedure:
Teachers Activities Students Activities
I. Warm up
The T write some verbs on theblackboard.Ask the Ss to write the form of simplepast and past perfect of the verbs.
Verbs provided:seetakecomevisitmeetswimringsingdo
II. presentation
1. Pronunciation:
The sound /e / and / /Instruct the way to pronounce:a. /e/ : First pronounce the sound I thenopen your mouth a little more. It is a shortsound.b. / / : First pronounce the sound I then
speakbreaksteal
see - saw - seen
take - took - takencome - came - comevisit - visited - visitedmeet - met - metswim - swam - swungring - rang - rangsing - sang - sungdo - did - donespeak - spoke - spokenbreak - broke - broken
steal - stole - stolen
Listen to the TListen to the tapesPronounce the sound.Distinguish the difference between thetwo sounds.
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 30/189
open your mouth a little more. It is a shortsound.Asks the Ss to pronounce and repeat.
English 10 Unit 3, P. 16
Language FocusTeachers Activities Students Activities
Task 1: Ask the Ss to read the words,
then the sentences.
Task 2: Grammar
Review the past perfect tense:
Form
+ S + had + Past Participle
- S + had not + P.P? () Had + S + P.P
Use: To describe an action before a point
of time or before another action in thepast.EX: I had locked the door carefully beforeI left the room last night.Practice:
Exercise 1: Use the correct form of the
given verbs.
Use the past perfect, comparing withsimple past.Who can put the verbs in correct form?Call the Ss to say their answer.Ask the other to give comments Exercise 2: Use the correct form of the
given verbs, compare past perfect with
simple past.Analyze the example:
She watched T.V after she had done allher homework. She had done all her homework:Happened first She watched T.V: Happened later
Exercise 3: Find the mistakes
Summary: Pronunciation: /e/ and / /
Read in pairs1. fat, man has >< red, pen2. handbag >< send, Helen3. Sam, said, apple >< very, expensive,then4. pans >< there shelf5. sad , cat >< Ben, bench, yellow
6. bab, mark >< never, get, French
1. had broken2. had done3. had met4. had not returned5.had ever seen6. had been
7. had left8. had moved9. had not seen10. had broken in
1. had just finished dinner/ came2. had seldom travelled / went3. went/ had already taken4. did you manage / had he gone / got
5. had just got / phoned / had been
1. climbed2. turned3. called4. heard5. had already gone
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 31/189
IV. homework: Review the use of tense.Prepare Test your self
Write the homework
English 10 Unit 3, P. 16
Language Focus
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 32/189
Unit 3 Period 21 :TEST CORRECTION
Date: October 11 th , 2010
A. Content
Skills: Reading, listening, writing, grammar.
Grammar: The Simple Past, Simple Present tenses
Present perfect tense, simple future tense Vocabulary: The vocabulary the Ss have study from lesson 1 to lesson 3
Writing : Sentences and tenses
Listening : Fill in the missing words.Information: Wh question
B. RESULT:
I. POPULAR MISTAKES
1. Tenses:
Simple present tense Negative S + do not / does not + v
Affimative: S + V(s,es)Question: WH + S + V ?
Simple past tense Negative S + did not + v
Affimative: S + V + ed
Question: WH + did + S + V ?
Present perfect tense Negative S + have / has not + P.P
Affimative: S + have / has not + P.P
Question: WH + have / has + S + P.P ?
2. Writing:S – V - O / C – ADV / Prep. + N/ NP
II. MARKS:
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 33/189
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Period 21: READING
Date:
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Reading about special education to have good opinion on
education for disable children.
2. Knowledge: Reading to have knowledge about special education. 3. Skill : Reading
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. Warm up
The name of a school for disable children
There are 15 letters in it.
What letter do you choose?
Tha Ss tell the letter, the T says Yes or No and if ti
is yes, where it is in the box.
What is it?
II. presentation
I. Before you read
1. The things you do every day at school
Are they difficult for blind, deaf and mutechildren?
How can they do these things?
2. Look at theBlaire Alphabet. What does the
message mean?
II. While you read Vocabulary pre-teaching:
disable(adj) = be unable/incapable of doing st
dumb(adj) = not be able to speak
proper schooling (n) enough and good study.opposition (n) = opposing ideas
make efford (v) = try, attempt
to be proud of (a) = take pride on
Ask the Ss to read the words and make questions
with them.
Listen to the teacher.
Find the word
Answer
NGUYEN DINH CHIEU
have meal
walk
prepare meal
listen to the teacher
pronounce words
raise arms
look at the blackboard
write lessons
With the help of the Blaire Alphabet
and the equiptments.
We are the world
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 34/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Task 1:
Matching the collumns:
Asks the Ss to read the passage individually.
Encourage the Ss to guess the meaning of the
phrase
Call some Ss tell their answer.
Gives correct answer and explain them
Task 2:
Multiple choice
Tell the S to read the passage again more carefully
and complete the answer by circling the
responding letter.
Asks Ss to explain their answers.
Feedback and gives correct answers.
Call the Ss to read the reading passage in front of
the class.How can you choose?
III. After you read
Filling gapsAsks the Ss to work in pairs.
Encourage the Ss to guess the meaning of the
phrase
Call some pairs tell their answer.
Gives correct answer and explain them
SUMMARY: Reading: Special education for disable
Matching
Multiple choice and filling skillsIV. HOMEWORK:
Read the reading passage.Study words, phrases and structures used in the
passage.
1. C
2. E
3. A
4. B
5. D
Read the passage again more
carefully and complete the answer by
circling the responding letter.
Explain their answers.
Read the reading passage in front of
the class.
1. D2. B
3. A
4. C
5. D
1. disable
2. read
3. write
4. efforts5. opposition
6. time - consuming
7. Maths
8. arms
9. fingers
10. proud
Write the homework
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 35/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 36/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
3. What was your timetable?
4. Can you tell me about the tests and the
examinations at your school then?
5. What about homework?
6. What part of school life didn’t you like
then?
7. What did you like best then?
8. Do you often see you classmates now?
9. Do you ever have asocciates?
2. Task 3: After you read.
Have the Ss to tell about their friend afterinterviewing her/ him.
Summary: Speaking: Ask and answer about your
friend activities at secondary school
IV. homework:
Tell about your friends
I went to school every day. I had four or
five lessons a day. I had to study hard.
Write the homework
We had many test and two examinations a
semester. We had to pass them to be
continued at a higher grade. So we had to
try ourselver’s best.There was too much homework to do. We
had to study hard, went to bed late and got
up erly to revise our lessons.
The teachers sometimes gave too much
exercirses. We did not have enough time to
finish them.
I liked most of the things at school: The
teachers, classmates and schoolmates. And I
liked best the school activities. I joined the
singing and sport club. We used to haveactivities at weekend. Sometimes we had a
picnic on Sunday.
Yes. Many of them now study with me in
our school, evan in My class now. Some
study at the school in the city. But few
moved to other city so I rarely meet them.
Yes, we see each another one a years, on
summer holiday. We try to get together.
Lan is my classmates. We have just made
friends since the beginning of the grade.
She went to Dong Son secondary school.
She studied many subjects such as Civic
education, Liturature,Technology, History,
Maths, Geography, Physics, Informatics,
Physical education, Biology,Chemistry. She
loved her school very much. She joined
many school activities.
Write homework.
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 37/189
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Period 23: LISTENING
Date:
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: To listening some specific information about a specific class
for disabled children to have good opinion on education for disabled children.2. Knowledge: Filling the gaps
True or False statements
Retell the story.
3. Skill : Listening, Reading and guess the word meaning.
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook, Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. warm up:
Ask the Ss to find the words derived from the
following:
sorry
second
decide
able
II. presentation:
1. Before you listen:
1. Word form: The T explains the meaning of the words in the
box.
Photograph: (n) a picture or image taken by
photographer.
What is the word - class?
Photographer(n) a person who takes pictures
Photographic(adj) being to photography
Photogenic (adj) having interesting features that
are suitable for Photographing.
Who can complete the spaces?
Asks the Ss to complete the spaces.
Ask them to read the answer in front of the class.Is the answer correct? Why? Why not?
Give feedback and correct answer:
2. Listen and repeat The T ask the Ss to listen, and then read the words
Work in groups. Find the new words:
sorry: sorrow, sorrily
second: secondly, secondhand,
secondary
decide; decision, decisive, decisively
able: disabled, disability
Listen to the T.
Read the words.
Fill in the blanks
1. Photographic
2. Photography
3. Photographer
4. Photograph
5. Photogenic
Listen and repeat.
We can see the sorrow in her eyes.
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 38/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Vocabulary pre-teach
surrounding(n) Conditions, objects that make the
living environment.
sorrow(n) pain or distress by lost or disabilily.
passion: (n) great love for something.
labourer(n) person who work manually, workingclass.
deaf (a) : Partly or entirely unable to hear
mute (adj) = dumb : unable to speak.
exhibition(n) a display, a public showing.
Ask the Ss to read and make some sentences with
the words.
II. While you listen:Task1. Listen and make T or F.
Let the Ss read the statements carefully.Ask them to listen to the tapes.
Make T or F?
What is your answer?
Task 2. Gap Filling.
Have the Ss read the part of the takl carefully and
guess the meaning of the missing words.
Have the Ss to listen to the tapes and write their
answer.
Call on some Ss to read the answer alound in frontof the class.
Feedback and give correct answers:
III. After you listen:Retell the story about the Vang Trang Khuyet
Photography club
Summary:
The Vang Trang Khuyet Photography club
IV. homework: Retell the story about the Vang Trang Khuyet
Photography clubPrepare for writing: Read the task.
They have great passion on that
perfum.
They are the children of the
labourers.
He is deaf.
The deaf can usu that equipment tohear.
Have you ever been to an exbihition?
1. T
2. F(Information not given)
3. T
4. F(The subject of their photos
about people and scenery)
5. T
1. photographic
2. 19
3. exhibition
4. 50
5. beauty
6. simple
7. peaceful
8. chickens
9. stimulated
10. escapeThe Vang Trang Khuyet
Photography club includes 19
members from many school for
disabled children. They have taken
more than 50 photos which are on
display at the exhibition room
featuring the beauty of daily life
from the eyes of disabled children.
The passion from taking photos
helped them escape from their
sorrow and estimulate them in life.
Write the homework
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 39/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 40/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 41/189
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Period 25: LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date: October 25 th , 2010
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Pronunciation.
The + Adj
Used to + VWhich
2. Knowledge: Distinguish the sounds / o / and /o: /
Used to + infinitive: Habit in the past
The + Adj: Group of people as the whole
Relative pronoun: Which to refer to the whole of the earlier
clause.
3. Skill : Grammar uses
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. Warm up
Yes/ no questions:
Have the Ss to listen to the T and answer the
questions:
Let the Ss to tell their answers.
Did you use to cry at night?
get up early?
drink milk?be afraid of ghost?
go out without clothes?
II. presentation
I. Pronunciation:
1. Demonstrate the sound / o/ and /o:/
Instruct the way to pronoun the two sounds
What is the most different between them?
Ask the Ss to repeat some times.
2. Practice:Read the words.
Have the Ss to listen to the teacher and then repeat
them.
Ask them to read individually in front of the class. Correct the mistakes.
Yes. I did
No, I didn’t
Yes, I did
No, I didn’t
Yes, I did.
/ o/ is a short sound
/o:/ is a long sound
Repeat the sounds / o/ /o:/
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 42/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
II grammar and vocabulary:
Exercise 1 The + Adj
Give an example:
The young have the future in their hands.
What is young?
The young?
How is the verbs used?
Have the Ss read the words.
Let them work individually and tell their answer
in front of the class.
Feedback and give correct answer.
Exercise 2 USED TO + V
Their parents used to believe that their children
learn anything at all.
How is USED TO + V used?
How is negative form used?
question form used?
Ask the Ss to do complete the answer.
Call on them to say their answers.
Exercise 3 Which relative pronounWhere are the children in Mr. Thuy class come
from?
What is which?
What is it used for?
How is it used?
Let the Ss to join the sentences.
Who can join?
It is an Adj
The people who are young
The + Adj -> Adj is used as a group
of people as a whole.
Plural.
2. the injured
3. the unemployed4. the sick
5. the rich / the poor
to express a pass action and state
which have no present equivalent.
S + did not + use to + v
… Did + S + use to + v ?
2. used to have
3. used to live4. used to eat
5. used to be
6. used to take
7. used to be
8. Did you used to go
They come from large and poor
family which prevent them from
having good proper schooling.
A relative pronoun
To refer to the whole of the earlierclause.
Replace the noun, pronoun
1. Sheilla couldn’t come to the party,
which was a pity.
2. Jill isn’t on the phone, which
makes it difficult to contact her.
3. Neil has passed the exams, which
is good news.
4. Our flight was delayed, which
meant we had to wait for hours at the
airport.
5. Ann offered to let me stay in her
house, which was very nice of her.
6. The street I live in is very noisy
which makes…
UNIT 4 SPECIAL EDUCATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 43/189
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period 26: READING
Date:
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Reading about computer, ubderstand the importance of
computer in modern society
2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about computer such as CPU, VDU, CD
ROMS, floppy disks …. And talk about their benefits in our modern life.
3. Skill : Improve reading skill through Matching and answering exercises.
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. Warm up
Ask the Ss to look at the picture and match the
pictures with the words or phrases.
Call the Ss to match.
Feedback and give correct answers.
II. presentation
1. Before you read
Vocabulary:
miraculous (adj) = wonderful, fantastic
calculate(v) calculating machine
calculator(v)
calculation(v)
lightning speed: very fast speed like the light.
storage (n)
memo(n) = memorandums
request for leave.
2. While you read
Task 1: Matching
The T reads the reading passage.
Ask the Ss to read and match the words in A
with those in B.Encourage the Ss to guess the meaning of the
words .
Call the Ss to read and explain their answers.
Call the Ss to match.
Feedback and give correct answers.
Listen to the teacher.
Match the pictures with the words or
phrases.
1. D
2. E
3. G
4. C
5. A
6. F
7. B
8. H
Can I borrow your calculator?
Computer can do sum with lightning speed.
Can I borrow your calculator?
Computer can do sum with lightning speed.
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói\
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 44/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Task 2: Title for the reading passage.
Tell the Ss to read the reading passage more
carefully and choose the best title for it.
Let the Ss discuss their answer with a friend.
Encourage them to explain their answer.
Call the Ss to tell their choice.
Feedback and give correct answers.Task 3: Answering the questions:
Have the Ss work in pairs and answer the
questions using the cues:
1. What can a computer do to help us in our
daily life?
Visit?
Pay?
Read?
receive and send?
learn?
2. Why is a computer a miraculous device?
Calculating machine
electronic store
magical typewriter
personal communicatior
entertaiment.
After you read:
Tell about other use of computer in ourmordern life.
Summary: Reading about computer, a recent
achievement in our society.IV. homework: Summarize the reading passage.
1. c
2. e
3. a
4. b
5. d
The best title:
c. What can a computer do?
1. They help us:
visit shops, offices, places of scenicbeauty.
pay bills
read newspaper
receive letters
send letter
learn foreign languages.
Because it is capable of doing anything
you ask it to do.
It can speed up the calculations, allowyou to type and print any kinds of
document, manage large collections of
data, help us t interact with other
computer and people around the world,
help us relax by playing games or listen
to music.
What computer can do.
Computer device.
Write the homework
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói\
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 45/189
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period 27: SPEAKING
Date:
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Speaking about computer, understand the importance of computer
in modern society.
2. Knowledge: Talk about the uses of modern inventions in our society such as
radio, TV, fax machine, air conditioner ….
3. Skill : Speaking skill.
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
What is it?
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1: Asking and answering questions Have Ss work in pairs: Ask and answer
questions about the uses of modern
inventions following the example:
Could you tell me what a cell phone is used
for?
Well, it is used to talk to people when you
are away from home.
Look at the pictures and answer
It is :
1. TV
2. fax machine
3. air condition
4. radio
5. electric cooker
6. fridge
7. cell phone
8. car
Listen to the teacher.
Ask and answer questions about the uses
of modern inventions following the
example:
Could you tell me what a ……………….
used for?
1. radio
2. TV
3. fax machine4. electric cooker
5. air conditioner
Well, it is used to 1. listen to news and
learn foreign languages.
2. watch football
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói\
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 46/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Task 2: Pairwork.
Kepp the Ss work in pairs and ask them to
complete the sentences by using the words in
the box.Ask the Ss to study the sentences carefully
before choosing words.
Call some Ss to read their sentences.
Information technology is very usefull to our
lives. What does it allow us to do?
With the development of information
technology we can now:
Task 3: Ordering.
Have Ss work in group by joining two parts.
Ask them to look at the ideas in Task 2 and
then rank them in prder of importance.
Encourage them to discuss in group to give
the reason to support their ideas and persuade
the others that you are right.
Task 4: The using of information
technology. Talk about the use of information technology
: What does it allow us to do?
Summary: Speaking about information technology, such
as TV, cell phone, fax machine, ….. a recent
achievement in our society.
IV. HOMEWORK Write about the use of information
technology : What does it allow us to do?
matches and TV games shows.
3. send and receive
letter quickly.
4. cook rice and
keep rice warm.
5. keep the air cool
when it is hot and vise versa.
1. Store very large amounts of ….
2. Transmit information quickly.
3. process information ….
4. send message…
5. hold long ….
6. make use ….7. send TV …
8. receive TV …
9. design ….
Suggested answer:
1. Transmit information quickly.
2. process information ….
3. Store very large amounts of ….
4. send message…
5. hold long ….6. make use ….
7. send TV …
8. receive TV …
9. design ….
I think that the most important use of
information technology is transmit
information because it is very important to
have information at the right time in our
industrial society.
Write the homework
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 47/189
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period 26: READING
Date: ......................
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Reading about computer, understand the importance of computer
in modern society2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about computer such as CPU, VDU, CD ROMS,
floppy disks …. And talk about their benefits in our modern life.
3. Skill : Improve reading skill through Matching and answering exercises.
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. Warm up
Ask the Ss to look at the picture and match thepictures with the words or phrases.
Call the Ss to match.
Feedback and give correct answers.
II. presentation
1. Before you read
Vocabulary:
miraculous (adj) = wonderful, fantastic
calculate(v) calculating machine
calculator(v)calculation(v)
lightning speed: very fast speed like the light.
storage (n)
memo(n) = memorandums
request for leave.
2. While you read
Task 1: Matching
The T reads the reading passage.
Ask the Ss to read and match the words in Awith those in B.
Encourage the Ss to guess the meaning of the
words .
Call the Ss to read and explain their answers.
Call the Ss to match.
Feedback and give correct answers.
Listen to the teacher.
Match the pictures with the words orphrases.
1. D
2. E
3. G
4. C
5. A
6. F
7. B
8. H
Can I borrow your calculator?
Computer can do sum with lightning speed.
Can I borrow your calculator?
Computer can do sum with lightning speed.
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 48/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Task 2: Title for the reading passage.
Tell the Ss to read the reading passage more
carefully and choose the best title for it.
Let the Ss discuss their answer with a friend.
Encourage them to explain their answer.
Call the Ss to tell their choice.Feedback and give correct answers.
Task 3: Answering the questions:
Have the Ss work in pairs and answer the
questions using the cues:
1. What can a computer do to help us in our
daily life?
Visit?
Pay?
Read?
receive and send?
learn?
2. Why is a computer a miraculous device?
Calculating machine
electronic storemagical typewriter
personal communicatior
entertaiment.
After you read:Tell about other use of computer in our mordern
life.
Summary: Reading about computer, a recent achievement
in our society.
IV. HOMEWORK Summarize the reading passage.
1. c
2. e
3. a
4. b
5. d
The best title:
c. What can a computer do?
1. They help us:
visit shops, offices, places of scenic
beauty.
pay bills
read newspaper
receive letters
send letter
learn foreign languages.
Because it is capable of doing anything
you ask it to do.
It can speed up the calculations, allowyou to type and print any kinds of
document, manage large collections of
data, help us t interact with other
computer and people around the world,
help us relax by playing games or listen
to music.
What computer can do.
Computer device.
Write the homework
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 49/189
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period 27: SPEAKING
Date: ......................
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Speaking about computer, understand the importance of computer
in modern society. 2. Knowledge: Talk about the uses of modern inventions in our society such as radio,
TV, fax machine, air conditioner ….
3. Skill : Speaking skill.
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
The teacher asks questions:
What is it?
II. PRESENTATION
Speaking
Task 1: Asking and answering questions Have Ss work in pairs: Ask and answer
questions about the uses of modern
inventions following the example:
Could you tell me what a cell phone is used
for?
Well, it is used to talk to people when you
are away from home.
Task 2: Pairwork.
Kepp the Ss work in pairs and ask them to
complete the sentences by using the words in
the box.
Listen to the teacher.Answer the questions.
It is :
1. TV
2. fax machine
3. air condition
4. radio
5. electric cooker
6. fridge
7. cell phone
8. car
Listen to the teacher.
Ask and answer questions about the uses
of modern inventions following the
example:
Could you tell me what a………….
used for?
1. radio
2. TV
3. fax machine
4. electric cooker5. air conditioner
Well, it is used to:
1. listen to news and learn foreign
languages.
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 50/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Ask the Ss to study the sentences carefully
before choosing words.
Call some Ss to read their sentences.
Information technology is very useful to
our lives. What does it allow us to do?
With the development of information
technology we can now:
Task 3: Ordering.
Have Ss work in group by joining two
parts. Ask them to look at the ideas in Task
2 and then rank them in order of
importance.
Encourage them to discuss in group to give
the reason to support their ideas and
persuade the others that you are right.
Task 4: The using of information
technology. Talk about the use of information
technology : What does it allow us to do?
Summary: Speaking about information technology,
such as TV, cell phone, fax machine, ….. a
recent achievement in our society.
IV. HOMEWORK Write about the use of information
technology : What does it allow us to do?
2. watch football matches and TV games
shows.
3. send and receive letter quickly.
4. cook rice and keep rice warm.
5. keep the air cool when it is hot and
vise versa.
1. Store very large amounts of ….
2. Transmit information quickly.
3. process information ….
4. send message…
5. hold long ….
6. make use ….
7. send TV …
8. receive TV …
9. design ….
Suggested answers:
1. Transmit information quickly.
2. process information ….
3. Store very large amounts of ….
4. send message…
5. hold long ….
6. make use ….
7. send TV …8. receive TV …
9. design ….
I think that:
The most important use of information
technology is transmit information because
it is very important to have information at
the right time in our industrial society.
Write the homework
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 51/189
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period 28: LISTENING
Date: ......................
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Listen about a story of a man who does not know how to use acomputer and under stand the importance of using computer and other achievement of
technology in our society.
2. Knowledge: Listen to the passage, choose T or F information and complete the
spaces, then tell the story shortly.
3. Skill : Listening, T / F and gap filling.
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Tick in the column:
How often do you use these things every day?
II. PRESENTATION
1. Before you listen:
Listen and repeat:
The T reads the words, then asks the Ss to readafter.
2. While you listen:
Task 1
Ask the Ss to read the given sentences carefully
before listening to the tapes.
Read the story several times.
Call the Ss to say their answer.
Feedback and give correct answer
Very often: Listen to the radio, use
computer, watch TV.
Sometimes: camcorder, cell phone.
Never: Fax machine.
Listen to the teacher. Read the words
or phrases.
worriedmemory
refused
excuse -> To make an excuse
VDU
headache
1. F ( He wasn’t worried )
2. T
3. T
4. F ( He understood about computer
and became the father’s teacher.)
5. F ( He did not understand the
lesson well)
6. F He made an excuse to leave the
lesson until another day.
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 52/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Task 2: Gap filling
The T reads the text again and asks the Ss to write
the missing words.
Tell the Ss to write the exact word for the blanks.
Let the Ss to discuss their answer with friends.
Feedback and give correct answer:
3. After you listen:
Ask the Ss to work in pair and ask and answer
about the man’s story.
Guiding questions:
1. What did the man’s son buy?
2. Why did he become worried?
3. What didn’t he know?
4. What happened to the man memory?
5. What did he suggest?
Have the Ss to tell the story.
Go around to check the Ss writing.
Summary:Listen about a story of a man who does not know
how to use a computer and under stand the
importance of using computer and other
achievement of technology in our society.
Choose T or F information and complete the
spaces, then summary the story
IV. HOMEWORK Write the story of the old man.
Listen to the T, write the correct
answer, discuss the correct words
with friend.
1. invited2. still
3. refused
4. excuse
5. anything
a computer
His secretary asked him to buy a
computer.
He did not know how to use a
computer.
He could not understand anything.
To leave the lesson to another day, in
fact he never took the lesson again.
The story is about an old man who
doesn’t know how to use a computer.
When his secretary asked to buy a
computer, he became worried
because he didn’t know how to use
it. He asked his son to teach him but
he didn’t’ understand anything and
he suggested leaving the lesson until
another day. In fact he never took
lesson on computer at all.
Write the homework
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 53/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 54/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 55/189
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period 30: LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date: ......................
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Pronunciation.
The present perfect and present perfect passive appropriately.
2. Knowledge: Distinguish the sounds / u / and / u: /
The present perfect : S + has + P.P
Present perfect passive : S + has + been + P.P
3. Skills : Pronunciation and the use of the present perfect and present perfect passive
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
III. WARM UP
Who / which / where
Put the words in correct column:
park / school / student / teacher/ farmer /
nurse/ doctor / scholarship/ pupil / summer / bank
/ market / museum / dictionary / board
IV. PRESENTATION
I. Pronunciation
1. Demonstrate the sound / u/ and /u:/
Instruct the way to pronoun the two soundsWhat is the most different between them?
Ask the Ss to repeat some times.
2. Practice:
Read the words.
Have the Ss to listen to the teacher and then repeat
them.
Ask them to read individually in front of the class.
2. Grammar and vocabulary
a. The present perfect:The use: Express an action which began
in the past and still continues.
Adv: Since / for
Since : the time to begin an action.
For : A period of time.
Who:
student / teacher/ farmer /
nurse/ doctor /
Which
scholarship/ dictionary / board
Where
park / school / bank / market /
museum
/ u/ is a short sound /u:/ is a long sound
Repeat the sounds
/ u/ /u:/
Listen to the teacher.
Practise
Listen to the teacher.Repeat the rules and structure.
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 56/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
* Structure: + S + have / has + P.P
- S + have not / has not + P.P
? (…) Have / has + S + P.P
Have the Ss to do the exercises.
Call them to tell their answers.
Feedback and give correct answers.b. The present perfect passive:
* Structure: + S + have / has + been + P.P
Ex: A new brigde has been built across the river.
Ask the Ss to work in pairs and do exercises.
Call them to write their answers on the
blackboard.
Feedback and give correct answers.
c. Relative clauses
Filling the blanks using Who / which / that.
Who and which can be used in place of noun
subject and object. When they refer to the subject,
they can non normally be omitted.
Who refers to people.Which refers to thing.
That refers to both man and thing.
Ask the Ss to fill and call them to tell their
answers.
Give feedback and correct answer.
Summary: Present perfect and Present perfect
passive.
Relative clause. IV. HOMEWORK:
Review the sentences in the notebook.Prepare for new lesson: Read the reading passage.
1. Tan has opened the door.
He has turned on the TV
He has tidied the house
He has cleaned the door
He has turned on the light
He has laid two bottles of wateron the table.
1. A new hospital has been built in
our city.
2. Another man - made satellite has
been sent up into space.
3. More and more trees has been cut
down for wood by farmer.
4. Thousand of animals have been
killed ..
5. About hundred building and
houses have been destroyed.
6. More than 50 films have been
shown
7. Their hands have been washed and
dried …
8. Another book has been read
9. Some ink has been split.
10. She has bee shown..
1. Which2. Which
3. Which
4. Who
5. Who
6. Who
7. Who(m)
8. Which
9. Which
10. Who
Write the homework
UNIT 5 TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 57/189
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Period 31: READING
Date: ......................
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Read a letter about famous places in Viet Nam such asHuong Pagoda, Thay Pagoda in the North Viet Nam.
2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about famous places. Improve reading
comprehension skill by doing Multiple choice and answering the questions in the
reading.
3. Skill : Reading
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES
STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIESI. WARM UP
Asks questions.
Tell about famous places in Viet Nam. Where
are they?
II. PRESENTATION
I. Before you read:
a. Matching:Match the photos with the pictures.
b. Vocabulary: Ask the Ss to close the book.
Have them combine the verb in A with its
object in B.
To have an excursion
to make our love to them
to make a two - day trip
to stay some days off
to give the night awayfrom home
II. While you read:
a. Task 1: Multiple Choice
Ask the Ss to read the letter and choose the
best answer A, B, C or D to complete the
sentences.
Listen to the teacher.
Answer the questions.
Sapa resort Thien Mu Pagode
Huong river Huong Pagoda
Thay Pagoda One Pillar Pagoda
Mi Son Pagoda Da Lat City
Nhat Le Beach Nha Trang Beach
Phong Nha Cave Ha Long Bay
1. D
2. B
3. A
4. C
To have some days off
to make a two - day trip
to make an excursion
to stay the night away from hometo give our love to them
Listen to the teacher
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 58/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Call the Ss to read and explain their answers.
Feedback and give correct answers.
b Task 2: Answering the questions
Ask the Ss to work in pairs.Call some pairs to act out the activity in front
of the class.
Feedback and give correct answers.
III. After you read:
Summary completion:Have the Ss work individually and fill each of
the blank with a suitable group of words from
the text.
Ask the Ss t read the text carefully before
doing the task.
Have them to compare their answer with theother.
Call on some Ss to read their answer.
Give feedback and correct answer.
Summary: Reading about some famous places in VN.
III. HOMEWORK
Summarize the reading in homework note
book
Listen to the teacher.
Complete the answer.
1. C
2. D
3. C
Suggested answers:
1. They are going on the trip when they
have some days off after the 1st term.
2. They are going to visit some caves
because they want to understand their
geography lesson better and many of
them have never been inside of the
caves.
3. It is over 20 km.
4. They are going to make a two daytrip and have a night campfire. They are
bringing their own foot and sharing
buses with other class to make the trip
cheap.
5. Lan is anxious about her parents
permission. They may not want to let
her stay the night away from home.
1. is going to
2. some caves
3. want to see
4. have learn
their trip
6. only problem
7. to persuade
8. her classmates
Write the homework
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 59/189
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Period 32: SPEAKING
Date: ......................
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: Talk about a boat trip abroad
2. Knowledge: Talk about the seat plan on a boat trip on Lake Michigan inChicago.
3. Skill : Speaking
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Ask the students to:
Find the words about famous places to visit
II. PRESENTATION
Speaking
Task 1:
Vocabulary:
sundeck (n)get sun burnt(adj)
travel sickness (n)
air - conditioned (adj)
refreshment (n)
occupied (adj)
Ask the Ss to study the sentences carefully
Call some Ss to read their sentences.
Information very useful for us to arrange the seats
for the Ss.
T sets up the situation
Asks Ss to list suitable seats corresponding to the
demands of each information in Task 1
Ex:
+are in sundeck (Tim): seats 1,6
Listen to the teacher.
Find the places
MountainRiver
Lake
Cave
Beach
village
Pagoda
Forest
……..
Listen to the teacher.
Read the words
Read the given sentences.
Read their answers
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 60/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
+can help give a good view
seats 16,29,34
Task 2:
Have Ss work in group and read the sentences
and decide the best seat for each person, usingthe information in task 1.
Some useful structures:
I don’t think so.
To be suitable for…
Why? Why not?
Why do you think so?
What ‘s your idea?
Encourage them to discuss in group to give
the reason to support their ideas and
persuade the others that you are right.
T invites some pairs to present the
conservation before the class
the rest of the class give comment.
T gives comments.
T asks Ss to look at the seat plan and find
suitable seats for them. Give reasons.
Task 3:Asks the Ss to choose their own seat and tell
the reason
III. HOMEWORKWrite a paragraph to choose their own seat
and tell the reason
do as required as quickly as possible
basing on the examples given.
-say out loud the seats they have found.
-look at the board, determine suitable
seat for each participant.
-work in groups of 4 to conduct a
conservation as required, using
examples in the book, useful
expressions and model conservation on
the board as cues.
I think Mary should....
she’d better....
It’s not a good idea because...seat 34 would be better...
Ss present their conservation before the
class.
some Ss give comment
Note down if necessary.
Tell the class the seats they like without
looking back at the information in the
book.
Expected conservation:A: now let’s begin with Mrs Andrew
which seat seems suitable for her?
B: I think she should sit in seat 12.
From here, she can see all the ss.
A: But look! It’s in the sundeck and she
does not like it. What about seat 34?
: Ok I think she will like it, so seat 34 is
or Mrs Andrew.
1. I think I should sit in section B
because I do not like air –
condition.
2. I think I should sit in section A
because I like air – condition.
3. I think I should sit in section B
because I like sundeck.
Write the homework
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 61/189
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Period 33: LISTENING
Date: November 10th, 2010
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: To get ss listen to the talking about a picnic to Botanical
Garden and do the given tasks: ordering pictures, filling in the gaps, answeringcomprehensive questions.
2. Knowledge: -By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to master the main content
of the listening text (time, place, activities of a weekend picnic, ect) and rephrase it into
speaking or writing form. Know how to make plan for a weekend picnic.
3. Skill : Speaking
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIESI. WARM UP
I have a word containing 6 letters. It means
pleasure party including outdoor meal.
What word is it?
II. PRESENTATION
1. Before listening:
*Ask Ps to answer the questions:
* Guide Ps to repeat these words.
2. While listening: OrderingTask 1: Ask Ps to study the picture
carefully.
Ask some questions about the pictures.
a, What do you see in this picture?
b, Where are the people?
c, What are they doing ?
d, What are they doing ?
e, Where are they standing ?
f, What do you see in the picture ?
PICNIC
Suggested answers:
1. Yes, I do.
2. At weekends or summer holiday.
3. To have a good time after hard work.
- Listen and repeat:
1. glorious (adj) : beautiful, shining
2.spacious (adj ) :large3.destination ( n) : a place to which a person
is going to
4.left – over ( n ) the rest : thøc ¨n thõa
5. Botanical Garden : V-ên B¸ch Th¶o
- A river and some trees.
- They are on the bus.
- They are taking photographs.
- They are taking a rest after meal.
- They are standing in front of the schoolgate.
- One boy is playing the guitar, some are
dancing.
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 62/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
-Ask Ps to listen and number the pictures.
Ask the Ss to look at the pictures carefully.
Call the Ss to say their answer.
Feedback and give correct answer
Task 2: Gap – fillingAsk Ps to guess the words to fill.
The t reads the text again and asks the Ss to
write the missing words.
Tell the Ss to write the exact word for the
blanks.
Let the Ss to discuss their answer with
friends.
Feedback and give correct answer:
Task 3: Answering questions:
Ask Ps to guess the answer, then compare
the answers.
3. After listening:Ask Ps to work in group and map out
the plan for the picnic this weekend.
When to go?
Where to go?
How long to go?
What to take along?
III. HOMEWORK:
Prepare for new lesson: Writing
Suggested answers:1. a 2. e
3. b 4. c
5. f 6.d
Listen to the T write the correct answer,
discuss the correct words with friend.Listen and fill
Suggested answers:
1. was a few weeks ago
2. to pay a visit
3. at the school gate
4. a short tour
5. playing some more
Work in group.
Suggested answers:
1. The weather was very nice.2. Yes, it was.
3. The garden was beautiful.
4. They could sleep soundly because it
was so peaceful and quiet in the garden.
5. They took pictures, played games,
talked, sang and dance.
Discuss and make a decision:
Nhat Le Beach
Phong Nha Cave
MountainThe countryside
Next Sunday
At Christmas
Next summer holiday
For a day
For two days
Only the morning / afternoon
Food: bread
noodle
canned food
butter …..
Drinks: mineral warder
milk
fruit juice
Write the homework
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 63/189
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Period 34: WRITING
Date: ......................
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write a
confirmation letter responding to a request and an invitation.
2. Knowledge : Request – Can you go shopping with me to buy the things
we need for the trip?
Confirm –Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything you
need for the trip.
3. Skill: Writing a confirmation letter.
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Which words you can use with
LETTER?
What are they?
II. PRESENTATION
Explain the definition of request andconfirmation letter.
Request is the letter that asks for
information or help.
Confirmation is the letter that responds
to the request. It confirms whether the
help is provided or not.
Task 1:Finding request and
confirmation Ask the Ps to read the two letters below
and
find request in Nga’s letter and confirma-
tion in Hoa’s letter.
business
friendly
invitation
apology LETTER
thank you
complaint
love
get-well
confirmation
Suggested answers:Request: Can you go shopping with me to
buy the things we need for the trip?
Confirmation: Certainly. I will help you
to prepare everything you need for the trip.
Get the request clearly :
* Lan asks you to buy some fruits andbring them to her house
*Minh wants to borrow you a book
about wildlife.
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 64/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Task 2: Writing confirmation
Ask Ps to read the situations carefully and
find the request in both of them.
Tells Ss to choose one of these situations to
write a confirmation letter responding to each
of them
Ask Ps to work individually.
1. Congratulation on birthday
Confirmation
signature
Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with a
friend.
Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.
2. Tell if you can give the book
Confirmation
Suggest changing time to meet
Signature.
Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.
Call some Ps to write on the board. Give
feedback.
Summary:
Write confirmation letter responding to arequest and an invitation.
III. HOMEWORK
Write instructions.
1) Dear Lan,
Firstly I would like to
congratulate you on your 15th
birthday.
I’m glad to join your birthday party next
Sunday. Of course, I will help you to
prepare everything for the party. I will
buy all the things you need and bring
them to your house an hour before the
party.
See you later.
Yours,
Mai
2)
Dear Minh,
I am happy to tell you that the
book you want is available. You can use
it for a week. But I will not be at home
this Saturday. Can you come on
Sunday? I will wait for you all day.
See you then,
Yours
Nam
Dear Hoa,
I have received your letter which
requests the details of the application
form for the video library. I enclose
here the full form and you are asked to
fill out before send back to us. You can
send us before Christmas and remember
to attach a photo on the first page of theform.
I am looking forward to hearing from
you.
Your truly,
Director
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 65/189
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
Period 35: LANGUAGE FOCUS
Date: ......................
A. AIMS:
1. Educational aims : By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to use the present
progressive and be going to in situations appropriately.
2. Knowledge : -/ ə / and / ə: /
- Present progressive with a future meaning and be going to
3. Skill: Listening, using the correct tenses.
B. METHODS: Communicative approach
C. TEACHING AIDS: Textbook; Pictures
D . PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
A B
1. stay a. some souvenirs
2. go b. some photos
3. send c. postcards
4. take d. at home
5. buy e. for a picnic
II. PRESENTATION
I Pronunciation:Demonstrate the sounds / ə / and / ə : / by
pronouncing them clearly and slowly.
/ ə : / first pronounce the sound / ə / then put
your tongue forward and up a little. It’s a long
sound.
/ ə / first pronounce the sound / ə : / but
make it short. It’s a short sound.
Ask Ps to practice these sentences.
* Barbara’s, camera
was
* water
thirsty, Nurse
1- d 2 – e
3- c 4 – b
5 - a
Listen to these sound
/ ə /
teacher, other
together, pagoda
about , today
1. about, pagoda
2. father, German
/ ə : /
bird , termwork , shirt
church , early
excursion
her, learning, German
birds, returned, earlier
UNIT 6 AN EXCURSION
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 66/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 67/189
Unit 7 THE mass media
Period 38 : ReadingDate : ……………………..
A. Objective:
1. Educational aims: Read about TV program schedules.
2. Knowledge: Be update with name of some popular TV programmes such
as Quiz Show, Portrait of life ………
Be able to tell about the Ss’ favourite programmes.3. Skill : Read and speak about T.V programmes and favourite programmes.
Finding the definitions, do T/F exercises and answer the questions
b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
d. procedure:
Teachers Activities Students Activities
I. Warm up
What forms of mass media do you know?
What are they?
II. presentation
1. Before you read
Pairwork:
1. When do you often watch T.V?
2. How many channels are their on our
national T.V?
What are they?
3. How many hour per week do you watch
T.V?
Has the Ss to listen to the tapes and fid the
new words.
Vocabulary pre - teach
Population and Development
T.V series
Folk songs
New headlines
Weather Forecast
Quiz Show
Portrait of life
Documentary
Radio
TelevisionNewspaper
Radio
Book
Internet …….
They are MASS MEDIA
At night.
After I finish my homework.In the evening / afternoon.
VTV1: Combination of Politics,
Economics and entertainment.
VTV2: Science and Education
VTV3: Entertainment
VTV4: For the overseas
VTV5: For the Ethnic minority groups
Ten / five / seven …..
Listen to the teacher.Give the meaning
Read the words in chorus then in
individual.
Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 68/189
Teachers Activities Students Activities
Wildlife World
Around the world
2. While you read
Task 1: Matching
Asks the Ss to read three T.V programmeschedules and do task1.
Have the Ss to compare their answer withothers
Further explain and give correct feedback
Asks the Ss to read the definitions again
Task 2: True or FalseTell the Ss to read the programmes
carefully and decide what the statements
are T or F.
Ask the Ss to explain their answer to the
class.
Give correct answer and feedback.
Check the information in the reading.
Task 3: Answering the questions:
Asks the Ss to work in pair and ask and
answer the questions in the book.Call some pairs to tell their answer to the
class
Feedback and give correct answers.
3. After you readKeep the Ss to work in pair and ask them
to tell the partner about one of the TV
programmes they like watching best and
explain why.
Call some to tell their answer to the class.
Summary:
Reading about TV programmes.
IV. homework:
Tell about the best programmes on TV
you like best.
Prepare for Speaking.
1 = c
A cartoon is a series of changing drawing.2 = a
A drama is a play for the theatre,television or radio.
3 = d
A comedy is a film or a play that is
interested to be funny, usually with a
happy ending.
4 = b
A documentary is a film or a television
programme giving facts about something.
1. T
2. T
3. F The Nature of Language is the
documentary programme at 15.15 on
VTV3.
4. T
5. F VTV1 starts at 5.35 and the last
programme starts at 23.30
1. There are 5 film on
2. At 9.00 a.m, 12.00 p.m, 7.00 p.m, 11
p.m on VTV1 and 7.00p.m on VTV3.3. VTV2
4. Quiz Show
5. VTV1
6. the football.
I like Game Show Who is the millionaire
beat because the games gives me a lot of
useful knowledge and I like the MC, Mr.
Lai Van Sam.
I like the programme Suc song moi
because it gives us a lot of usefulknowledge for women.
Write the homework
Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 69/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 70/189
Teachers Activities Students Activities
-Ask s to give the answer.
-Give feedback.Task 2:
Ask s to look at the chart, mark “x” on the
types of the mass media which has the
following features:
Features The
massmedia
TV ra..
b.. in.
1 provide information and
entertainment orally.
2 receive information
visually
3 present information &
entertainment visually4 receive information
Visually
5 present information &
Entertainment orally & v
6 get information aurally
and visually
7 provide/deliver
information and entert..
Task 3:
Ask Ss open the books.Get Ss to work in pairs, to talk about the
mass media using chart.
A: what ......... types .........?
B: .......................................
A: what features ................?
B: ........................................
A:what ......... own features?
B: ........................................
Go around the class to observe and give
help (if any)
Call 2 pairs of good Ss to go to board (tocheck)
Summary:
Speaking about TV programmes.
IV. homework:
Ask s to learn by heart new words.
Write a short paragraph about the types of
the mass media and their features.
Prepare the next lesson.
-Take notes.
Fea.. The mass media
TV Ra Bo
Internet
1 x x x
2 x x
3 x x x
4 x x x
5 X
6 X
7 x x x x
-Take notes.keys:
A: what are different types of the mass
media?
B: TV, radio, newspapers, Internet.
A: what features do they have in
common?B: provide/ deliver information and
entertainment.
A: what are their own features?
B: TV present ..... orally and visually.
A: what are different types of the mass
media?
B: TV, radio, newspapers, Internet.
A: what features do they have in
common?
B: provide/ deliver information and
entertainment.
A: what are their own features?
B: TV present ..... orally and visually.
Write the homework
Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 71/189
Unit 7 THE mass media
Period 40 : ListeningDate : ……………………..
A. Objective:
1. Aims: - Provide Ss with some new words/ phrases
By the end of the lesson students will be able to
Listen to 2 news on the radio to get information.Fill in the information in the blank and answer the question...
Practice skills of talking and writing.2. Knowledge: Listen to the tapes, then tick the words the Ss hear in the right
column, filling the spaces and answering the questions.
3. Skill : Listening
b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
d. procedure:
Teachers Activities Students Activities
I. Warm up
T asks s to close the book.
T introduces the picture of radio and asks
s to answer the questions.
1. What is it?
2. What is it used for?
3. How often do you listen to radio?
4. How many hours per week do you
listen to it?
5. What topics do you like listening to
and why?T leads in the new lesson.
II. presentation
T practices Ss to listen and repeat the new
words.
T deals with the difficult words (if
necessary).
Task 1: T gives the situation and explains.
Has the Ss to read the given informationT asks s to skim the task 1.
T plays the tape 3 times.
Goes around the class to help the Ss
Ask the Ss to give their answers
Listen to the teacher.
Ss close the book.
–It is a radio
To listen to news, music...
Every day …..
Ten hours….
Music
Weather forecastNews…
Ss look at the picture and answer the
questions.
Listen to the tapes
Ss open the book.
Ss skim the task 1.
Ss listen to the tape.
Ss work individually and work in pair to
discuss.
Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 72/189
Teachers Activities Students Activities
T checks and asks to work individually
then work in pair.
The T reads the verbs.
Task 2
T gives situation and explains how to do.
T asks s to read the passage.
T plays the tape 3 times.
T checks and asks to work individually
then work in-group.
Task 3
T gives situation and explains how to do.
T plays the tape 3 times.
T checks and asks to work individually
then work in-group.
T asks Ss to work in-group and retell the
content of the passage.
After listening:
T calls 1 good student to talk in front of
the class.
Other Ss listen and remark or correct
mistakes.
T asks to do writing text in the textbook.
Iii. homework:
T asks to do writing text in the textbook.
(Task 2 and 3)Prepare for new lesson:
Writing lesson
Keys:
News
story1
News
story2
healthy x
strong X
young x
Cloudy X
Highest x
Wonderful x
Fine X
News story 1: News story 2
Has caused floods 23rd
Have left their homes 4418
Have risen California
Two meters wonderfulHas stopped young and
Cloudy healthy
Strong wind
Keys:1 Heavy rain has caused floods all over the
county during the night.
2 Because rivers have risen.
3 The old lady has climbed Mount
Whitney twenty-three times.4. Because it has kept her young and
healthy.
One S talk in front of the class
Listen and correct
Write the homework
Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 73/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 74/189
Teachers Activities Students Activities
9. Learn more about the world and to
know and see many new things.-Tasks s
to work individually and then to work in
group for discussing.
T goes around to help s (if necessary)
T checks and gives the true answer.
Task 2
-T divides the class into 6 groups, and
asks s to work in group to fill in the
information of the advantages and
disadvantages.(2 groups will do the
same topic)
-Listening to music
-Reading newspaper
-Using the Internet
-T goes around to help s (if necessary)
Task 3Basing on the chart above T asks s to
write a short passage about the
advantages and the disadvantages+Listening to music
+Reading newspapers
+Using the Internet
+watching TVT asks s to work individually or groups.
T goes around to help s (if necessary)
T checks and feedback.
After writingCorrect the Ss work
iii. homework:
- T asks Ss to write a short passage
about the advantages and the
disadvantages of using the computer.
Keys:
Advantages
Listening
to radio
Make people
happy/life easier
Relax.Get/enlarge/
broaden knowledge
and understanding
Share
opinions/experiences
Reading
newspapers
Make people
happy/life easier
Get information on
many fields:
culture, art, business
Relax and entertain
Disadvantages
Waste time
Make people
Passive
Harm people eyes:
be short-sighted
cost time and
money
Make people
Passive
One of the most popular types of mass
media is watching TV. Most of the people
watch T.V in their free time, especially in
England. But there are advantages and
disadvantages of watching T.V. It makes
things more memorable because it presents
information in a more effective way. It also
increases the popularity of sports and
games so it entertains us. Besides, it help us
learn more about the world, know and seemany new things. But it also give us some
Disdvantages. It interferes with family life
and communication. It makes people
violent and encourages us to buy things that
we do not need. It also makes us passive
Write the homework
Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 75/189
Unit 7 THE mass media
Period 42 : Language FocusDate : ……………………..
A. Objective:
1. Aims: Help the Ss recognize an pronounce three sounds:/ / , / / and / /
Help the Ss review: how to use ADV-Phrase of cause and concession
(because of, in spite of)2. Knowledge: Understand and use the structures
3. Skill : Grammar Practice
b. methods: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
c. teaching aids: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
d. procedure:
Teachers Activities Students Activities
I. Warm up
T asks s to choose the underlined wordpronunciate /ei/, /ai/, / i/ and fill in the
right column.
wildlife enjoy day climb
style fly toy noise
demonstration place airline
railway
afraid buy radio paper
time play destroy height
II. presentation
I. Pronunciation
The T reads the words, then asks the Ss toread in chorus
Have some Ss to read the words
The T reads the sentences, then asks theSs to read in chorus
Have some Ss to read the sentences
Ii . grammar
Task 1: The Present Perfect Tense-T writes down the examples on the board
and asks s to find the sense, the usage of
The Present Perfect.Eg:
1. I have just cleaned the floor.2. My brother has read “Gone with
the wind” three times.
3. He has worked for BBC since 1990
4. We have learnt English for 4 years.
T asks s to choose the underlined word
pronunciate /ei/, /ai/, / i/ and fill in the
right column. /ei/ day, demonstration, place, railway,
afraid, radio, paper, play.
/ai/ wildlife, climb, style, fly, airline,
buy, time, height, / i/ enjoy, toy, noise, destroy
Listen to the teacher.
Read the words
Listen to the T, then read the sentences.
Listen to the T and take notes
Study the use of present perfect tense in
the sentences.
Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 76/189
Teachers Activities Students Activities
T asks Ss to base on the examples to repeat
the usage of The Present Perfect.
* What adverbs are used with Present
Perfect?T asks Ss to read the letter and choose the
verbs of the correct form.T asks Ss to work individually or groups.
T goes around to help s (if necessary)
T checks and gives the right answer.
Task 2:
Asks the Ss to read and complete the
sentences
Task 3: Phrase or clause of reason and
concession
T gives handout and asks ss to combine A
with B.
A
1. they did the test well
2. he could not solve the problem
3. the train was late
4.
she walked slowlyPhrases and clauses of reasonBecause + Clause(S+V+O)
Because of +N/N phrase/Gerund
In spite of/despite+N/Nphr/Gerund
Although/though+Clause(S+V+O)
Have the Ss to complete the sentences.
Summary :
Pronunciation.
Present Perfect and Phrase/
Clause of Reason
iii. homework:
-T asks Ss to make sentences with Phrases
and clauses of reason and Phrases and
clauses of concession.
* The usage: 1. an action has just happened
2. an action repeated many times in
the past
3. an action began in the past,happened in present and maybe
in the future.since, for, never, ever, so far, already,
recently, up to now…..
1. have been 2. have lived
3. have met 4. have done
5. have had 6. have taken
7. have watched
1. since 2. ago 3. for 4. or 5.
since
6. for 7. ago 8. ago 9. since
10. since
B
A because of her injured leg
B thought it was difficult
C although he is good at maths
D because of the thick fog
Keys: 1. They did the test well though it
was difficult
2. He could not solve the problem
although he is good at maths3. The train was late because of the
thick fog
4 She walked slowly because of her
injured leg
Keys:
1. Because of the cold weather, we kept
the fire all day.
2. In spite of the cold weather, we all
wore shorts.
3. Because of his illness, he had to
cancel the appointment.4. In spite of his illness, he managed to
come to school.
Write the homework
Unit 7 THE MASS MEDIA Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 77/189
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Period 83 : Reading Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary by matchingthe column, scan for specific information by gap-fill and decide True or False statement.B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UPAsks the Ss to answer the questions:What colour of these national footballteams?England?Brazil?
France?Viet Nam?Ireland
II. PRESENTATION
I. Before you read:
Ask s to work in groups to answer thequestions.Give some more questions.
Who is the man with the cup?What his number?
Vocabulary:Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then showthe new words.Explain new words:Passionate(adj) -> passionWitness (v)champion(n) -> championship (n)
compete (v) -> competitiongovern(v) -> government (n)title(n)honour (adj)Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus andindividually.
Answers the teachar’s questions:
WhiteYellow and green
BlueRedGreen
Ss do the task and give their answers.1. In Japan and Korea.2. Brazil3. Germany
He is Cafu, the captain of Brazil
Number two.
Look at their books and repeat after thecassette once.
Take note and repeat the words after theteacher.
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 78/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
II. While you read:
Task 1: Matching A with B
Let the Ss read the words and combine them.
Task 2: Fill in the blanks:Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs tocomplete the gapsGoes around the class to help the Ss.Asks some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class.
Task : True / false statements
Asks s to work in group and choose the bestchoice for the statements.T goes around class to help themT asks the Ss to say their answer.
After you read:
Ask the Ss to talk about the mentioned eventsT goes around class to help themT calls some pairs to practiceT corrects and gives feedback
III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.
Read the reading passage and give correctanswer.Keys:
1- b
2- c3- a4- e5- d
Read the reading passage, then work in pairsto fill in the blanksExpected answers:
1. 13
2. 323. Argentina4. one5. 26
Work in pair to choosee T or FExpected answers:1. F ( 1930)2. F (4 years)3. T
4. T5. F (5 times)
1. the year when FIFA was set up2. The number of teams taking part in 1st
W.C3. The year of 1st WC4. The number of WCT by 20025. The year when Wcwas held jointly
Work in group to summsrize the text
Summarize the reading passage in notebook.Prepare for new lesson: Speaking
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 79/189
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 43 : Reading
Date : ...................................A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: Read the passage , understand the story of the village and guessthe meaning of the words and phrases.
Read and answer the questions about the reading passage. 2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about a village. Improve reading
comprehension skill by filling the chart and answering the questions in the reading.3. Skill : Reading
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDUCE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
NetworksAsks the Ss to work in group and make alist of words related to the country.
II. PRESENTATION
Before you read:
a. Pair work: Discuss the questions
Have the Ss to work in pairs.
Go around the class and asks some to saytheir answers.Asks the Ss to say their answer in front ofthe class
b. Vocabulary: straw (n)mud (n)technical high schoolfarming methods
brick house (n) house made of bricksthank to (prep.) because ofHave the Ss to say the meaning.
farmer field
glass straw
They are harvesting the crop.They are working very hardIt is a bumper crop.Good farming methods, modern
technology, fertilizers, rotations…
Read the words, say the meaning.
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
crop
houses cattle
fowls
Country
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 80/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
While you read:
a. Task 1: Vocabulary matching
Ask the Ss to read the letter and choose thebest answer A, B, C or D to match with themeaning of the word.
Call the Ss to read and explain their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.Asks the Ss to tell the meaning of the words
b. Task 2: Table Completing
Asks the Ss to see the passage to get specificinformation to complete the table.Ask the Ss to work in pairs.Call some pairs to act out the activity in frontof the class.
Feedback and give correct answers.
c. Task 3: Answering the questions:
Asks the Ss to work in pairs: Read thereading passage and answer the questions.Call some pairs to act out the activity in fronof the class.Feedback and give correct answers.
After you read:
Discussion:
Have the Ss work in group and answer thequestions.Have the SS to work in group.Go around the class and asks the Ss todiscuss their answer with another groups
SUMMARY: Reading about a village.III. HOMEWORK Summarize the reading passage.
1. b cÇn kiÖm ®ñ sèng2. d thiÕu thèn ®ñ thø3. a c¶i thiÖn cuéc sèng4. e vô mïa béi thu
5. c c©y trång ®Ó b¸n thu lîi nhuËn
Houses: made of straw and mud / made ofbricks
Radio and TV: Few families had a radioor TV set / many families havethem.
Farming methods: Old / new
Crop: poor / good / bumperTravel: Not / by motorbikeSuggested answers:1. It was poor and simple.2. Because they hope that with an educationof science and technology their childrencould find a way of bettering their lives.3. They introduce new farming methodswhich resulted in bumper crop. They alsohelped grow cash crops for export.
4. He said their life had changed a lot thanksto the knowledge their children had broughthome.5. He told his grandchildren: “ Study harderso that you can do more for the village thanyour parents did”Work in group:
Use new methods.Grow more cash crop for exports.
Apply scientific progressHelp local people and family apply moderntechnology in farmingWrite the homework
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 81/189
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 44 : Speaking
Date : ...................................
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: Talk about a plan and results
2. Knowledge: Talk about plans to improve life of a village and their possibleresults.
3. Skill : Speaking B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
What should you use to improve the life in avillage?
II. PRESENTATION
Speaking
Task 1:
Vocabulary:resurface (n)canal (adj)
muddy (n)Ask the Ss to work in group and discussionabout the thing to do to improve the villagelife. Match the plan with its possible result.Call some Ss to read their sentences.
Task 2:
Have Ss work in group and read thesentences, using the given information.
What structure is used?
New technologyNew machinetractors
pumping machinesnew cash cropsopening a libraryUsing internet……………….
Listen to the teacher.
Read the wordsRead the given sentences.
Read their answers.Suggested answers:1. b2. g3. d4. e5. f6. c
Conditional sentences.
If the road are widened, cars and lorries canget to our village.If cars and lorries can get to our village, wewon’t have to cart heavy loads of farmingproducts to the city
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 82/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 83/189
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 45 : Listening
Date : .................................A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to listen and to a talkabout their hometown or home village changes.
2. Knowledge: Simple past tense.3. Skill : Listening skills through True / False and Gap-filling exercises.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. Warm-up: Crosswords
I have a word containing 6 letters. It meanspleasure party including outdoor meal.What word is it?
III. Presentation:
1. Before listening:*Ask Ps to look at the pictures and discussabout the changes between the two town.Ex:In the past, the town used to have only smallhouses, but now there are tall buildings.In the past there weren’t any hotel, but nowthere is a hotel in the village.
Have the Ss to work in groups.The T goes around the class, listen t the Tand give feedback.Asks some groups to tell their answers2. While listening: Task 1: True - False Statements
Ask Ps to study the given sentencescarefully.
Before listening, ask the Ss to say if thesentences are T or F
HOMEVILLAGE
Suggested answers:1. Yes, I do.2. At weekends or summer holiday.3. To have a good time after hard work.- Listen and repeat:1. glorious (adj) : beautiful, shining2.spacious (adj ) :large3.destination ( n) : a place to which a personis going to4.left – over ( n ) the rest : thøc ¨n thõa
5. Botanical Garden : V-ên B¸ch Th¶o
Tell their guesses:1. T
2. F3. T4. F5. T
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 84/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
-Ask Ps to listen.Call the Ss to say their answer.Feedback and give correct answer. Comparewith their guesses
Task 2: Gap – fillingHave the Ss to read the given passage tounderstand the meaning of the passage.Ask Ps to guess the words to fill.The T reads the text again and asks the Ss towrite the missing words.Tell the Ss to write the exact word for theblanks.Let the Ss to discuss their answer withfriends.
Feedback and give correct answer:
Task 3: Answering questions:
Ask Ps to guess the answer, then comparethe answers.
3. After listening:Ask Ps to work in group and map outthe plan for the picnic this weekend.
IV. Homework:
Write the story of the old man.
Listen to the T, write the correct answer.Compare with their guesses.Right answers:1. F (It is on the South of England)2. F (It used to be a small quiet town)3. T
4. F ( A lot of trees have been cut down forwider streets)5. F ( Some people don’t like the changes,they miss the quiet and peaceful life of theold town.)
Work in group.
Suggested answers:1. The weather was very nice.
2.Yes, it was.3.The garden was beautiful.4. They could sleep soundly because it wasso peaceful and quiet in the garden.
5. They took pictures, played games, talkedsang and dance.
Discuss and make a decision:Nhat Le Beach
Phong Nha Cave
MountainThe countrysideNext Sunday
At Christmas
Prepare for new lesson: Writing
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE
Period 46 : Writing
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 85/189
Date : December 23rd, 2006
A. OBJECTIVE:1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write a confirmation
letter responding to a request and an invitation.2. Knowledge : Request – Can you go shopping with me to buy the things we
need for the trip?
Confirm –Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything youneed for the trip.
3. Skill: Writing a confirmation letter. B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. Warm-up:
Which words you can use with LETTER?What are they?
II. Presentation:
Explain the definition of request and con-firmation letter.Request is the letter that asks forinformation or help.Confirmation is the letter that respondsto the request. It confirms whether thehelp is provided or not.
Task 1:Finding request and confirmation Ask the Ps to read the two letters below andfind request in Nga’s letter and confirma-tion in Hoa’s letter.
businessfriendlyinvitationapology LETTER thank youcomplaintloveget-wellconfirmation
Suggested answers:Request: Can you go shopping with me tobuy the things we need for the trip?
Confirmation: Certainly. I will help youto prepare everything you need for the trip.
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
English 10 Unit 8 , P. 46 Writing
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 86/189
Task 2: Writing confirmation
Ask Ps to read the situations carefully andfind the request in both of them.Tells Ss to choose one of these situations towrite a confirmation letter responding to each
of themAsk Ps to work individually.1. Congratulation on birthday
Confirmationsignature
Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.
2. Tell if you can give the bookConfirmation
Suggest changing time to meetSignature.
Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.
Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.
Summary:
Write confirmation letter responding to arequest and an invitation.
IV. homework: Write instructions.
Get the request clearly :* Lan asks you to buy some fruits and
bring them to her house
*Minh wants to borrow you a book
about wildlife.
1) Dear Lan,
Firstly I would like to congratuyou on your 15th birthday. I’m glad to join ybirthday party next Sunday. Of course, I whelp you to prepare everything for the partwill buy all the things you need and bring thto your house an hour before the party.See you later.Yours,Mai
2)Dear Minh,
I am happy to tell you that the book want is available. You can use it for a weBut I will not be at home this Saturday. Cyou come on Sunday? I will wait for youday.See you then,Yours
Nam
Dear Hoa,I have received your letter which requests thdetails of the application form for the videolibrary. I enclose here the full form and you asked to fill out before send back to us. Youcan send us before Christmas and rememberattach a photo on the first page of the form.I am looking forward to hearing from you.Your truly,Director
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 87/189
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 47 : Language Focus
Date : .....................................
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims : By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to use the presentprogressive and be going to in situations appropriately.
2. Knowledge : -/ ə / and / ə: /- Present progressive with a future meaning and be going to
3. Skill: Listening, using the correct tenses.B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:Matching
A B1. stay a. some souvenirs2.go b. some photos3.send c. post cards4. take d. at home5. buy e. for a picnic
II. PRESENTATION:
A. Pronunciation:Demonstrate the sounds / ə / and / ə : / bypronouncing them clearly and slowly. / ə : / first pronounce the sound / ə / then
put your tongue forward and up a little. It’s along sound.
/ ə / first pronounce the sound / ə : / butmake it short. It’s a short sound.
Ask Ps to practice these sentences.
* Barbara’s, camerawas
* waterthirsty, Nurse
1- d 2 – e3- c 4 – b5 - a
Listen to these sound
/ ə /teacher, other
together, pagodaabout , today1.about, pagoda2.father, German
/ ə : /bird , termwork , shirtchurch , early
excursionher, learning, German
birds, returned, earlier
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 88/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
B. Grammar:
The Present progressive and be going to-Which tenses do we use to express futuremeaning?Will : an intention or decision made at the
moment of speakingBe going to: an intention or decisionthought about before the moment ofspeaking, expressing a plan, prediction.Present progressive: a future arrangementbetween people, common with go, come,
see, visit, meet, have (a party)
Exercise 1: Choosing the correct option Ask Ps to do exercise.
Structure to use: S + To Be + V. ingAsk Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.
Ex 2 : Using the correct formsPresent Progressive or be going to?Ask Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.
Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.
Ex 3: Completing exchanges
Present Progressive or be going to?Ask Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.Summary:
Review the tenses: Simple future, presentprogressive, near future
III. HOMEWORKTest yourself B
E.g. :
I’ll give you my phone number. Ring metonight.E.g.: We are going to have a holiday in
Ha Long this summer.
E.g.: I am having a birthday party nextSunday. Would you come with me?
Suggested answers: 1.are you doing 4. am going to2.is getting married 5. is going to3.Are you going to
Suggested answers:
1.are going 4. are you putting2.are having 5. is not going to3.is going to catch give
Suggested answers: 1. Are you going to see it
I’m doing my homework.2. We are visiting our grandparents3. What’s he going to do with it ?
He’s going to buy a new motorbike.4. It’s going to rain soon.5. I’m going to clean them later.Repeat the structuresWrite homework
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 89/189
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Period 83 : Reading Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary by matchingthe column, scan for specific information by gap-fill and decide True or False statement.B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UPAsks the Ss to answer the questions:What colour of these national footballteams?England?Brazil?
France?Viet Nam?Ireland
II. PRESENTATION
I. Before you read:
Ask s to work in groups to answer thequestions.Give some more questions.
Who is the man with the cup?What his number?
Vocabulary:Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then showthe new words.Explain new words:Passionate(adj) -> passionWitness (v)champion(n) -> championship (n)
compete (v) -> competitiongovern(v) -> government (n)title(n)honour (adj)Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus andindividually.
Answers the teachar’s questions:
WhiteYellow and green
BlueRedGreen
Ss do the task and give their answers.1. In Japan and Korea.2. Brazil3. Germany
He is Cafu, the captain of Brazil
Number two.
Look at their books and repeat after thecassette once.
Take note and repeat the words after theteacher.
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 90/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
II. While you read:
Task 1: Matching A with B
Let the Ss read the words and combine them.
Task 2: Fill in the blanks:Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs tocomplete the gapsGoes around the class to help the Ss.Asks some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class.
Task : True / false statements
Asks s to work in group and choose the bestchoice for the statements.T goes around class to help themT asks the Ss to say their answer.
After you read:
Ask the Ss to talk about the mentioned eventsT goes around class to help themT calls some pairs to practiceT corrects and gives feedback
III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.
Read the reading passage and give correctanswer.Keys:
1- b
2- c3- a4- e5- d
Read the reading passage, then work in pairsto fill in the blanksExpected answers:
1. 13
2. 323. Argentina4. one5. 26
Work in pair to choosee T or FExpected answers:1. F ( 1930)2. F (4 years)3. T
4. T5. F (5 times)
1. the year when FIFA was set up2. The number of teams taking part in 1st
W.C3. The year of 1st WC4. The number of WCT by 20025. The year when Wcwas held jointly
Work in group to summsrize the text
Summarize the reading passage in notebook.Prepare for new lesson: Speaking
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 91/189
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 43 : Reading
Date : ...................................A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: Read the passage , understand the story of the village and guessthe meaning of the words and phrases.
Read and answer the questions about the reading passage. 2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about a village. Improve reading
comprehension skill by filling the chart and answering the questions in the reading.3. Skill : Reading
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDUCE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
NetworksAsks the Ss to work in group and make alist of words related to the country.
II. PRESENTATION
Before you read:
a. Pair work: Discuss the questions
Have the Ss to work in pairs.
Go around the class and asks some to saytheir answers.Asks the Ss to say their answer in front ofthe class
b. Vocabulary: straw (n)mud (n)technical high schoolfarming methods
brick house (n) house made of bricksthank to (prep.) because ofHave the Ss to say the meaning.
farmer field
glass straw
They are harvesting the crop.They are working very hardIt is a bumper crop.Good farming methods, modern
technology, fertilizers, rotations…
Read the words, say the meaning.
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
crop
houses cattle
fowls
Country
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 92/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 93/189
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 44 : Speaking
Date : ...................................
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: Talk about a plan and results
2. Knowledge: Talk about plans to improve life of a village and their possibleresults.
3. Skill : Speaking B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
What should you use to improve the life in avillage?
II. PRESENTATION
Speaking
Task 1:
Vocabulary:resurface (n)canal (adj)
muddy (n)Ask the Ss to work in group and discussionabout the thing to do to improve the villagelife. Match the plan with its possible result.Call some Ss to read their sentences.
Task 2:
Have Ss work in group and read thesentences, using the given information.
What structure is used?
New technologyNew machinetractors
pumping machinesnew cash cropsopening a libraryUsing internet……………….
Listen to the teacher.
Read the wordsRead the given sentences.
Read their answers.Suggested answers:1. b2. g3. d4. e5. f6. c
Conditional sentences.
If the road are widened, cars and lorries canget to our village.If cars and lorries can get to our village, wewon’t have to cart heavy loads of farmingproducts to the city
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 94/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
How is it used?What ‘s its structure?Asks the Ss to practise in group of three.* Build a bridge over the canal-> The villagers have a shorter way to town.-> They can take their farming products to
the town and get more money--> build amedical centre -> People’s health is lookedafter -> grow more cash crops.Have the Ss to discuss in group. The T goesaround the class, listen to the Ss and correcttheir answers.Asks some groups to practise in front of theclass.Give feedback and correct the answers.
* Build a new school -> The children canhave better conditions to study -> Studybetter -> Go to higher education -> Help thevillage grow cash crops -> get more money -> build a football ground -> The young andthe old can play sports or do exercises ->they become healthier to work.
Let the Ss to discuss in group. The T goes
around the class, listen to the Ss and correcttheir answers.Asks some groups to practise in front of theclass.
Summary: Speak about the plans for the village.
III. HOMEWORK
Made ten conditional sentences, type 1 aboutyour plans for study.Prepare for Listening. Read the giveninformation.
Future possibleMain clause: Simple futureIf clause: Simple present
A. What should we have to do first?B. In my opinion, we should build a bridge
over the canal first.C. That ‘s right. If we build a bridge over thecanal, we can take our farming products tothe town and get more moneyA. Great. And if we get more money, we willbuild a medical centreB. And if we build a medical centre, people’shealth will be looked afterC. Yes, if our health is looked after, we willgrow more cash crops.
D. Let discuss about what to do first. Whatdo you think?E. I think we should build a new school firstF. It’s a great idea. If we build a new schoolfirst, our children can have better conditionsto studyD. And if they have good conditions tostudy, they will study better.E. Great. And if they have good condition to
study, they can go to higher education.F. Yes, I think so. And if they can go tohigher education, they can help the villagegrow cash crops and we can get more moneyD. That’s right. And if we can get moremoney, we will build a football groundE. And if we build a football ground, theyoung and the old can play sports or doexercisesF. And if they can play sport every day, theywill be healthier to work and study.
Write the homework
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 95/189
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 45 : Listening
Date : .................................A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to listen and to a talkabout their hometown or home village changes.
2. Knowledge: Simple past tense.3. Skill : Listening skills through True / False and Gap-filling exercises.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. Warm-up: Crosswords
I have a word containing 6 letters. It meanspleasure party including outdoor meal.What word is it?
III. Presentation:
1. Before listening:*Ask Ps to look at the pictures and discussabout the changes between the two town.Ex:In the past, the town used to have only smallhouses, but now there are tall buildings.In the past there weren’t any hotel, but nowthere is a hotel in the village.
Have the Ss to work in groups.The T goes around the class, listen t the Tand give feedback.Asks some groups to tell their answers2. While listening: Task 1: True - False Statements
Ask Ps to study the given sentencescarefully.
Before listening, ask the Ss to say if thesentences are T or F
HOMEVILLAGE
Suggested answers:1. Yes, I do.2. At weekends or summer holiday.3. To have a good time after hard work.- Listen and repeat:1. glorious (adj) : beautiful, shining2.spacious (adj ) :large3.destination ( n) : a place to which a personis going to4.left – over ( n ) the rest : thøc ¨n thõa
5. Botanical Garden : V-ên B¸ch Th¶o
Tell their guesses:1. T
2. F3. T4. F5. T
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 96/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
-Ask Ps to listen.Call the Ss to say their answer.Feedback and give correct answer. Comparewith their guesses
Task 2: Gap – fillingHave the Ss to read the given passage tounderstand the meaning of the passage.Ask Ps to guess the words to fill.The T reads the text again and asks the Ss towrite the missing words.Tell the Ss to write the exact word for theblanks.Let the Ss to discuss their answer withfriends.
Feedback and give correct answer:
Task 3: Answering questions:
Ask Ps to guess the answer, then comparethe answers.
3. After listening:Ask Ps to work in group and map outthe plan for the picnic this weekend.
IV. Homework:
Write the story of the old man.
Listen to the T, write the correct answer.Compare with their guesses.Right answers:1. F (It is on the South of England)2. F (It used to be a small quiet town)3. T
4. F ( A lot of trees have been cut down forwider streets)5. F ( Some people don’t like the changes,they miss the quiet and peaceful life of theold town.)
Work in group.
Suggested answers:1. The weather was very nice.
2.Yes, it was.3.The garden was beautiful.4. They could sleep soundly because it wasso peaceful and quiet in the garden.
5. They took pictures, played games, talkedsang and dance.
Discuss and make a decision:Nhat Le Beach
Phong Nha Cave
MountainThe countrysideNext Sunday
At Christmas
Prepare for new lesson: Writing
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE
Period 46 : Writing
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 97/189
Date : December 23rd, 2006
A. OBJECTIVE:1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write a confirmation
letter responding to a request and an invitation.2. Knowledge : Request – Can you go shopping with me to buy the things we
need for the trip?
Confirm –Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything youneed for the trip.
3. Skill: Writing a confirmation letter. B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. Warm-up:
Which words you can use with LETTER?What are they?
II. Presentation:
Explain the definition of request and con-firmation letter.Request is the letter that asks forinformation or help.Confirmation is the letter that respondsto the request. It confirms whether thehelp is provided or not.
Task 1:Finding request and confirmation Ask the Ps to read the two letters below andfind request in Nga’s letter and confirma-tion in Hoa’s letter.
businessfriendlyinvitationapology LETTER thank youcomplaintloveget-wellconfirmation
Suggested answers:Request: Can you go shopping with me tobuy the things we need for the trip?
Confirmation: Certainly. I will help youto prepare everything you need for the trip.
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
English 10 Unit 8 , P. 46 Writing
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 98/189
Task 2: Writing confirmation
Ask Ps to read the situations carefully andfind the request in both of them.Tells Ss to choose one of these situations towrite a confirmation letter responding to each
of themAsk Ps to work individually.1. Congratulation on birthday
Confirmationsignature
Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.
2. Tell if you can give the bookConfirmation
Suggest changing time to meetSignature.
Ask the Ss to exchange their writing with afriend.
Call some Ps to write on the board. Givefeedback.
Summary:
Write confirmation letter responding to arequest and an invitation.
IV. homework: Write instructions.
Get the request clearly :* Lan asks you to buy some fruits and
bring them to her house
*Minh wants to borrow you a book
about wildlife.
1) Dear Lan,
Firstly I would like to congratuyou on your 15th birthday. I’m glad to join ybirthday party next Sunday. Of course, I whelp you to prepare everything for the partwill buy all the things you need and bring thto your house an hour before the party.See you later.Yours,Mai
2)Dear Minh,
I am happy to tell you that the book want is available. You can use it for a weBut I will not be at home this Saturday. Cyou come on Sunday? I will wait for youday.See you then,Yours
Nam
Dear Hoa,I have received your letter which requests thdetails of the application form for the videolibrary. I enclose here the full form and you asked to fill out before send back to us. Youcan send us before Christmas and rememberattach a photo on the first page of the form.I am looking forward to hearing from you.Your truly,Director
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 99/189
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Period 47 : Language Focus
Date : .....................................
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims : By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to use the presentprogressive and be going to in situations appropriately.
2. Knowledge : -/ ə / and / ə: /- Present progressive with a future meaning and be going to
3. Skill: Listening, using the correct tenses.B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:Matching
A B1. stay a. some souvenirs2.go b. some photos3.send c. post cards4. take d. at home5. buy e. for a picnic
II. PRESENTATION:
A. Pronunciation:Demonstrate the sounds / ə / and / ə : / bypronouncing them clearly and slowly. / ə : / first pronounce the sound / ə / then
put your tongue forward and up a little. It’s along sound.
/ ə / first pronounce the sound / ə : / butmake it short. It’s a short sound.
Ask Ps to practice these sentences.
* Barbara’s, camerawas
* waterthirsty, Nurse
1- d 2 – e3- c 4 – b5 - a
Listen to these sound
/ ə /teacher, other
together, pagodaabout , today1.about, pagoda2.father, German
/ ə : /bird , termwork , shirtchurch , early
excursionher, learning, German
birds, returned, earlier
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 100/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
B. Grammar:
The Present progressive and be going to-Which tenses do we use to express futuremeaning?Will : an intention or decision made at the
moment of speakingBe going to: an intention or decisionthought about before the moment ofspeaking, expressing a plan, prediction.Present progressive: a future arrangementbetween people, common with go, come,
see, visit, meet, have (a party)
Exercise 1: Choosing the correct option Ask Ps to do exercise.
Structure to use: S + To Be + V. ingAsk Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.
Ex 2 : Using the correct formsPresent Progressive or be going to?Ask Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.
Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.
Ex 3: Completing exchanges
Present Progressive or be going to?Ask Ps to practise in pairs.Have the Ss to do the exercises.Call them to tell their answers.Feedback and give correct answers.Summary:
Review the tenses: Simple future, presentprogressive, near future
III. HOMEWORKTest yourself B
E.g. :
I’ll give you my phone number. Ring metonight.E.g.: We are going to have a holiday in
Ha Long this summer.
E.g.: I am having a birthday party nextSunday. Would you come with me?
Suggested answers: 1.are you doing 4. am going to2.is getting married 5. is going to3.Are you going to
Suggested answers:
1.are going 4. are you putting2.are having 5. is not going to3.is going to catch give
Suggested answers: 1. Are you going to see it
I’m doing my homework.2. We are visiting our grandparents3. What’s he going to do with it ?
He’s going to buy a new motorbike.4. It’s going to rain soon.5. I’m going to clean them later.Repeat the structuresWrite homework
UNIT 8 THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 101/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 102/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 103/189
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD
Period 55: Speaking Date : January 3
rd , 2010
A. OBJECTIVE 1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to know how to
protect our oceans, talk about causes and consequences and offer solutions.
2. Knowledge: Put the actions in order and discuss sollutions
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
T gives games.
+What should we do to protect our
environment?
plastic bags clean the beach
waste paper no smoking
-What would you do if our environment hadmuch rubbish?
T corrects and introduces new lesson: To
understand more about undersea world to day
we learn unit 9 lesson: Speaking.
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1T asks s to work in pairs. There are
Some actions that should be taken to protect
our oceans. Put them in order the importance
and explain why.
T directs the Ss to do.
Asks the Ss to speak and explains the reason.
+Who can find out the new words?
Ss work in-group and answer.
-S listen and answer.
Tell the answers
S work in pairs.
-Speak and explain the reason
The answer can be different.
1: a, d, b,
2. b, d, c
3. b, c, d…..
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
The activitiesto protect...
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 104/189
Write the new words:
+Sparingly
+Dispose of
+Smart shopper
+Endangered
-T reads new words then Ss repeat.
Task 2
T asks s to work in groups. There are somethreats to the health of the oceans. Discuss the
consequences that might occur and offer some
possible solutions.
T directs Ss to do.
T asks Ss to report.
The consequences might occur:
-Beaches are filled with plastic bags, pieces of
glass and cigarette butts.
Asks Ss to offer some possible solutions.
Asks Ss to keep the beach clean and placetrash, plastic bags in proper bust bins.
Asks Ss to continue to discuss the
consequences and offer some possible
solutions.
Goes around the class to check and help the Ss
to practice.
Has some pairs to practice in front of the class.
Gives feedback and correct answers
Task 3
The teacher asks the Ss to work in group andreport their ideas in front of the class.
Goes around the class to check and help the Ss
to practice.
Has some pairs to practice in front of the class.
Gives feedback and correct answers
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Summary:
Speaking: Tell about actions that harm the seaand sea animals. Pair work and discussion
* Preparing for new lesson:
Read information in listening lesson.
Find new words or phrases.
Tell the new words and read them
Write new words in the note books
Group work:
Expected answers: 1. A. Whales and sharks are still hunted for
food, medicine, and other products. Thismakes them become extinct.
B. We should not fish for them because
they are limited/ threatened /
endangered
2. A. Explosives are used to catch fish and
other sea animals. This make sea animals be in
danger.
B. We should not use explosives to catch
fish because it can kill all the animals in the
sea.
3. A. Oil is spilled from the tankers. This
makes the sea polluted and kill marine
animals.
B. We should protest the oil tankers and
clean the sea after oil spilling.Report the content of the discussion in front of
the class.
Expected answers: 1. Whales and sharks are still hunted for
food, medicine, and other products. This makes
them become extinct. So we should not fish for
them because they are limited/ threatened /
endangered
2. Explosives are used to catch fish and
other sea animals. This makes sea animals be
in danger and we should not use explosives to
catch fish because it can kill all the animals in
the sea.
3. Oil is spilled from the tankers. This
makes sea polluted and kill marine animals
We should protest the oil tankers and clean thesea after oil spilling.
Look at new lesson
Take notes
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 105/189
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD
Period 56: Listening Date: January 3
rd , 2
A. OBJECTIVE 1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to listen about
whale, a species of animal living in the sea and practice skills of talking and writing.
. 2. Knowledge: Listen and choose the true and false information. Fill in the information in the blank and answer the questions.
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
T asks s to close the book
-T asks s to give some ways of the protections
of the undersea environment.-T corrects.
-T hangs the big picture of whale on the green
board and asks s.
+What is it?
+Who can describe it?
-T introduces new lesson: To understand more
about the whale. Today we will learn Unit 9
lesson: listening.
II. PRESENTATION1. Before you listen:
Activities 1
Write 2 questions on the green board
+ Do you think whales are fish? Why (not)?
-Asks s to discuss in pairs before answering.
+Why do people keep hunting whales?
-Introducing some vocabularies which will
have in cassette.
+mammal+krill
+blue whale
+whaling
+Atlantic
+migrate.
+pacific
+conservation
S close the book
-S work individually
-S listen and answer.
Look at the picture and answer the questions:
It is a whale
It is very long
It is very big
Whales are not fish because they raise their
young on milk.
-Because they want to catch whales for food,
oil, leather and other products.
-Listen and write
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 106/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
2. While you listen
Task 1:
-Translate the requirement into Vietnamese.
-T explains
-Who can find the new words?
-T opens cassette (the first) and (the second).
-T writes Ss’ keys on the board and asks Ss to
explain why (T can give good marks)
-T opens cassette (the third)
Task 2:
-Translate the requirement into Vietnamese.-T explains
-Who can find the new words?
-T opens cassette (the first) and (the second).
Has the Ss to answer the questions
-T writes Ss’ keys on the board and asks Ss to
explain why (T can give good marks)
After you listen:
Ask the Ss to work in group to talk about
whales, using the given cues:
Their length and weight.
Their feeding grounds and food
The reason for protecting whales.
Have some pairs tell their answers in front of
the class
Gives feedback and correct the mistakes.
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Summary:Listening: Listen about whales.
T / F Information
Ask and answer the questions.
* Preparing for new lesson:
Read information in language focus lesson.
Study the grammar note
Find new words or phrases.
S work individually
S find and answer.
Expected answers:
1. F
2. T
3. T
4. F
5. T
Listen and check the keys.
Discuss in pairs.
Listen to the tapes.Answer
Check.
Expected answers: 1. The blue whale grows to 30 meters in
length and 200 tons in weight.
2. Because there ins a lot of krill – their
favourite food in cold water.
3. Cold water in the North and South
Atlantic Ocean and Pacific is .
4. Heavy hunting is.5. They have asks the IWC to stop …
6. They would disappear forever.
Repeat the content of the lesson
Tell the answers in front of the class.
Work in groups and then a person answers.-Listen and write.
+Length: 30 meters
+Weight: 200 Tons
+Food: krill; in cold water.
+Reason to protect
Disappear not
Take notes
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 107/189
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD
Period 57: Writing Date : January 10th , 2010
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to underst
the description of the sperm whale and complete the table.
-Write a paragraph that describes the facts and figures (about the dolphin) provided
the table.
2. Knowledge: Improve their writing skill. B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
-Dividing s into 2 groups
-Using gestures, mine or other words to
explain some animals of the sea.
(Starfish; turtle; shark; sperm whale; whale;
dolphin; jellyfish; fish; crab; shrimp;)
-Asking each group in turns to guess the
animals (if they have right word, they will get
one point)
+The group that has more points will be
winner.
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1:-Asking some questions about the pictures in
the textbook.
+Where is it?
+What kind of animals is it? (Are they)
-Do you know any thing about them?
-Sperm whales are the biggest animals that
have teeth.
-Dolphins are the most intelligent animals
(These answers are up to the s)
*Pre-teaching some new words:+Range habitat: (explanation)
+Carnivore: example
+Life span: example
+Offspring: picture
+To be at risk: explanation.
-Asking s to read the description and the
information in the table carefully.
--Asks s to answer some questions.
Listen to the T and answer the questions
Playing the game.
-Guessing the words.
Go to the blackboard and write the words.Starfish turtle shark
sperm whale whale dolphin
jellyfish fish crab shrimp
Answer the questions.
Expected answers:
+It is at the sea
+It is a sperm whale
-They are dolphin
Listen and write
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLDGiáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 108/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Asks the Ss to read the description and the
information in the table carefully.
--Asks s to answer some questions.
+Where do sperm whales live?
+Where can sperm whales be found?
+Which ocean do they prefer?+ Would you tell me the length and the length
and weight of a male/female whale?
+How long is a gestation period?
+How about offspring?
+How long can whales be?
+What are some tricks that people play on
whales?
+Why should people be concerned about
endangered whales?
Task 2:
-Divides class into 4 or 6 groups (it defends on
the arrangement of the desks in the class room)
-Gives each group a poster
-Asking the groups to fill in the table of task 1.
-When finishing, ask them to stick their poster
on the board and feed back.
-Asks Ss to read the information in the table
carefully and use the information to write a
paragraph that describes the facts and figures
provided in the table.
-T goes round and monitors.
-Giving Ss some help if necessary.
Task 3:
Asking Ss to correct their partners’ papers.Feeds back.
III. SUMMARY AND HOMEWORK
Asks s to write a paragraph (120 words) about
one of the sea animals that they know
Be ready for language focus lesson
Read carefully and answer.
Expected answers: They live in all ocean, but they prefer water
with high squid population.
The male can grow up to 18 meters in length
and weigh up to 54,000 kg
The female can grow up to 12 meters in length
and weigh up to 17,000 kg
14 to 19 months
Give birth to one calf every five to seven
years.
Hunting and fishing.
So that they can not be in danger of extinction.
Work in groupWrite the paragraph. Suggestion writing: Dolphin are not fish. They are mammals that
live in the water. Dolphins are among the most
intelligent animals on Earth. Although they canbe found in all ocean in the world, they prefer
coastal water and bays. The size of Dolphin
vary greatly. The smallest Dolphin is just
about 50kg in weight and 1.2meters in length
while the largest one can weight up to 8.200kg
and is 10 meters long. Dolphins are carnivores
and they eat mainly fish. A female dolphin
gives birth to one calf every two years after a
gestation period of eleven to twelve months. A
dolphin can normally live from twenty to sixty
years and some species of dolphins can even
live longer. Dolphin populations are at risk due
to the population of their habitat and accidental
entrapment in fishing net.
Peer correction
Take notes
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 109/189
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD
Period 58: Language Focus Date : January 10 th, 2010
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able
distinguish the pronunciation between / / and / / sounds, how to use should and sente
Type II.
2. Knowledge: Advice and giving ideasPutting the verbs in correct form.
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
The teacher gives some words and asks the
people to read them.
*Play game: (use cards)-Divide the class into two groups
-Hangs all cards on the board and gives
instruction for the game.
II. PRESENTATIONI. Pronunciation
/ i: / and / i /
Task 1:T presents how to pronounce the sounds:
/ /, / / and / /-Says the sounds in context of the words
A, Listen and repeat:
-Reads or plays the tape once and asks s to
repeat.
-Reads two times
-Calls some s to practice
-Asks s to close your book
Listen to the T
Put the words in correct column.
Fell -> felt
Take -> took
Understand -> understood
Walk -> walked
Come -> came
Listen to the T
Repeat the words after the T
Listen to the tapes
Repeat
Practise
UNIT 9 UNDERSEA WORLD
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
UnderstandWalkCome
CameTaken
FeltUnderstood
Walked
Feel Take
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 110/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 111/189
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Period 59 : ReadingDate : .............................
A. OBJECTIVE
By the end of the lesson students will be able to
- Widen vocabulary topic “environment” and use them to talk about
reasons why some animals have become extinct.
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
Asking some questions.
1. What are some global problems?
2. what need we do to solve these
problems?
* Introducing the word conservation by
asking some questions.
1. What is conservation?
2, Do we need to protect plants and
animals? why or why not?
II. PRESENTATION
Before you read:1. Ask the Ss to answer the questions
2. Vocabulary:
Giving for s “handout” and guiding the way
to do.
Put the suitable forms of words:
NOUN VERB
1, ? 1,protect
2, ? 2,destroy
3,pollution 3, ?
4,damage 4, ?5,conservation 5, ?
6, ? 6, disappear
While you read:
Answer
Keys:
1. protection
2. destruction
3. pollute
4. damage
5. conserve6. disappearance
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
environmental
problems
forest
fires
The extinction
of plants &...
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 112/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
The T has the Ss listen to the reading
passage.
Task 1: Matching A with B
Let the Ss read the words and combine them.
Task 2: True / False Statements
Have the Ss read the text and decide if the
statements are true or false.
Give feedback and correct answers
Task 3: Choosing main idea Translates the main idea to find the topic.
Asks the Ss work ion group to find main idea
for each paragraph.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks the Ss to say their answer in front of the
class.
Topic: Many of those plants and animals canbe used as medicine against cancer, AIDS...
After you read:
Discussion:Answer the questions:
Asks the Ss to discuss the answers for the
questions.
Has them tell the answers.
Summary:
Reading about a village.
III. HOMEWORK
Summarize the reading passage.
Read the reading passage and give correct
answer.
Keys:
1- C2- A
3- D
4- B
Keys:
1. F
2. T
3. T
4. T
5. F6. F
Work in group to find the main idea.
Keys:
Passage A- 3: Forest give us a lot of valuable
things.
Passage B - 4: Vegetation can help conserve
water.
Passage C - 2: Let’s do something to save the
earth.
Keys:
1. The loss of many forests is destroying the
earth.
2. Man and most animals need a coast and
supply of water to live farmers need water
for their crops.
3. We should stop polluting rivers and seasand stop the disappearance of plants and
animals.
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 113/189
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Period 60 : SpeakingDate : January 15
th, 2010
A. OBJECTIVE
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to- Improve their speaking skill
- talk about threats to animals, especially rare animals solutions for
protecting them
- make them more aware of the protection of animals
B. METHODS : Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
Plays game: Brainstorming
+Calls 2 s to go to the board and asks them
to name some animals they know.
II. PRESENTATION
Before you speak: Task 1
Question- answer.
Asks s to look at the picture in the textbook
and then answer the questions (page 107)What can you see in the picture?
What should people do to save endangered
animals?
Pre-teach vocabulary.
Asks s to read the whole paragraphs and
find out new words.
Explains vocabulary
+against one’s will (idiom)
(translation)
+Kent (explanation)The name of an area in East-South of
England. It’s famous for growing vegetable
Go to the board and name some animals
elephant, tiger, horse, fish, gorilla...
Listen to the T and answer the questions:
I can see a gorilla
People should create real reconstruction of
the animals’natural environment.
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
animals
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 114/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 115/189
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Period 61 : ListeningDate : January 15
th, 2010
A. OBJECTIVE
By the end of the lesson students will be able to listen and understand some
information about the forest fire, the reasons cause the forest fire and the way how to savethe forest from fire. B. METHODS Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
-Jumbled words:
resfot iref-Introducing the content of the new lesson. II. PRESENTATION
Before you listen:
-Teaching vocabulary:
+forester (n) (example)
+campfire (n) (picture)
+destroy (v) (synonym)
+valuable (adj) (explanation)
+awful (adj) (example)
-Checking new words by Rub out andremember.
-Asking s to close the books
-Giving some pictures about forest fire and
asking s some questions.
1, what do you see in the picture?
2, have you ever seen a forest destroyed by
fire?
3, which reasons may cause the forest fire?
-T feedback and introduce the content to
listen.
While you listen:Task1: Listen and number the events
you hear in the order
-work in groups to find the word:
“Forest fire”
write and read the words.
-listen, repeat, remember and rewrite.
close the books
-look at the pictures and answer some
questions
-work in pairs.
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 116/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Asks s to read the requirement of the
exercise
Asks them to read the events to understand
the content.
Lets s guess by numbering the events in the
order.
Plays the tape twice.
T gives feedback.
Task2:
Listen again and decide whether the
following statements are true or false
Asks s to read the requirement of exercise.
Lets s read the statements
Asks s to guess T or F.
Plays the tape onceChecks the answer
Plays the tape sentence by sentence
T gives feedback.
Task3: Asks the Ss to Listen again and tick (v) the
sentences you hear.
The steps are the same task2
Plays the tape once
Plays the tape sentence by sentence
T gives feedback After you listen:
Discussion:
Asks s to work in pairs to say how a forest
fire may start and what every camper ought
to remember.
Has the SS to work in group.
Go around the class and asks the Ss to
discuss their answer with another groups
III. HOMEWORK
Asks s to write a paragraph (about 100
words) to say about what may cause a forest
fire.
Read the requirement
Read the events.
Work in pairs by guessing
Listen and number the events in the order s
hear
Keys:
3
2
1
4
Read the requirement-Read the statements in silently
-Work in 2 groups by guessing T or F
Keys:
1.F 2.F 3.T 4.T 5.F
Listen and tick (v) the sentence you hear
Keys:1. B
2. A
3. A
A forest fire may start when the campers
leave a campfire burning near a heap of
leaves. They ought to remember to cover thecampfires by earth.
Write homework.
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 117/189
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Period 62 : WritingDate : January 15
th, 2010
A. OBJECTIVE
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to understand thecontent and the language using in the friendly letter of
invitation and understand how to write a friendly letter of invitation.
B. METHODS : Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
T gives the jumbled sentence.
a/dinner/evening/for/go/like/out/this/to/
you/would?
-T asks s the purpose of the question above.
-T asks s to give the same sentences.
-T gives some questions:
1,Have you written a letter of invitation?
On which occasion?
2,What do you often write in a letter of
invitation?
3,What are some expressions do you write
in a letter of invitation?
-T lead-in: A letter of invitation
II. PRESENTATION
Before you write:
Task 1:
T explains how to do.
T goes round to help.
-T asks s to look at the complete sentences.Would you like +..........(to infinitive)
How about +...........(verb +ing)
Do you feel like+..........(verb +ing)
Are you free +............(to infinitive)
S close the book.
key:
->“Would you like to go out this evening
for dinner ?”
Yes
On my birthday party
Reason, date, time, place to come
Read the phrases and combine them
keys:
1.c
2.f
3.a
4.g
5.h
6.d
7.e
8.b
S open the book.
S work in pairs.
S open the book.
S work in pairs.
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 118/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
While you write:
Task 2:
-T asks s to skim the exercise and underline
the words/phrases.
-T goes round to help.
-T corrects mistakes and feedback.
Task 3: T asks s to read through the
exercise and write the sentences to complete
a letter.
-T goes round to help.
-T asks s to complete a letter
After you write:
Ask the Ss to look at the writing and correct
it if it is necessary.
III. HOMEWORK :
Write the letters to answer the invitation(Accepting or refusing letters)
1. Let’s try the cake I have just make.
2. Why don’t you join us in this trip?
3. Would you like to have a cold drink?
4. Do you feel like taking a walk for a while?
5. Can you sing with us a Vietnamese song?
6. How about going to the cinema tonight?
7. Shall we have some chicken soup first?
8. Are you free to play table tennis now?
Read the letters and complete them.
Keys:
1. Are you free/ Would you like;
2. Would you like/Are you free to go/howabout;
3. Can you/why don’t we....
Write the letter:
Dear Lam,
We have not met since your moved. I miss
you a lot. We are both having some days off
between the two terms soon. If you haven’t
made any other plans, why don’t we spend a
weekend together?
Do you feel like visiting the forest near my
grandparents’ home again? It looks quite
different now because very many young
trees have been planted at the Tree-planting
Festival.
Do come if you find it possible and I will
make all the preparation then.
Give my love to your parents.
Your friend,Nam
Look at the writing and correct it.
S work individually and in groups to correct
mistakes.
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 119/189
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Period 64 : Language FocusDate : January 15
th, 2010
A. OBJECTIVE
By the end of the lesson, the Ss will be able to recognize an pronounce two sounds:/ b/and /p/ and to use the passive voice and p[practice reading, speaking, listening, writing
skills
B. METHODS : Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
Jumbled sentences.1,back/bed/brought/big/breakfast/
Bernie/a/to/the.
->Bernie brought a big breakfast back to the
bed.
2,put/purple/pool/the/paint/in/Pat.
->Pat put purple paint in the pool.
-T presents how to pronunce 2 sounds /b/ /p?
II. PRESENTATION Pronunciation
1. Listen and repeat
-T reads or plays the tape once and asks s to
repeat.
-T calls some s to practice
-T gets them to find out the words that have
these sounds.
2. Practice the sentences:
T plays tape one or two times and get s to
listen.
-T calls s to practice in pairs
-T gets them to find out the words that have
these sounds.
S close the book.
-S work in groups
S listen and repeat
-S practice
-S find out.
S listen and practice in pairs.
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 120/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
The passive voice.
-T asks s to retell the form of the passive.
BE + PAST PARTICIPLE
-In the passive voice, the object of the active
sentence become the subject of the passive
voice.
-T asks s to do exercises.Exercise 1
T explains the exercise
T goes around to help them
T calls some s to go the board to do exercises
and then T checks and corrects mistakes.
Exercise 2
T explains how to do
T calls s to go the board to do exersises.
T checks and gives feedback.
find out the mistakes in the followingsentences and correct them. (T gives s
handout)
Exercise 3:
Has the Ss read the conversation andconplete the spaces by using the words in the
box.
Goes around the class to help and check the
Ss’ work.
Ask the Ss to read their answer in front of the
class.
III. HOMEWORK
Rewrite the sentences
Look at the examples and tell the rule
Keys:
1.were reported
2. grow
3. be spoken
4. am not visited
5. are being built
Keys:
1,came had started-were
2,is standing- is being photographed
3,Have been told
4,was being laid-decided
5,will be planted
-T asks s to do exercise 3
Keys:
1. was organized
2. arrived
3. were met
4. taken
5. had been cleaned
6. had been put
7. was
8. prepared
9. made
10. were served
UNIT 10 CONSERVATION
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 121/189
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK
Period 65 : Reading Date: ........................
A. OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to understand the content of the text
and use the new words, know about the use of the national parks, have responsible to protect
the national parks and improve reading skill.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
The teacher asks the students look at
the picture
on the board and answer the questions
1. What can you see in these pictures?
2. Where can they co-exit (or livetogether)? In the mountain or in the
national park?
T leads in new lesson: National Park.
II. PRESENTATION
Before you read:
a. Pair work: Discuss the questions
1. Name some national parks in Vietnam
you know or hear about?2. Where is Cuc Phuong national park?
3. What is the area of the rainforest in Cuc
Phuong National park?
4. When is the best time to visit Cuc
Phuong National Park?
T checks and gives feedback.
T plays tape and asks the Ss to listen
T explains some new words
b. Vocabulary:1. locate (v) = situate
2. orphan (v) -> Orphanage (n)
3. contaminate (v = pollute
contamination(n)/contaminated (adj)
Look at the picture and answer the
questions:
I can see trees, plants, animals, mountains,
caves.
-They co-exit in the national park.
Answer
1. Cuc Phuong, Cat Tien, Cat ba, U
Minh, Bach Ma, Ben En ….
2. South west of Ha Noi
When rainy season finishes.
Read the words
Write
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 122/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
4. zone(n) = area
5. toxic (adj)
While you read:
Task 1: Find the word for definition:
T asks s to work in pairT calls s to go the board to write their
answer.
T checks and gives feedback
Task 2: Answer the questions:Asks the Ss to work in group, read the
passage to get the information about threenational parks.
T goes around class to help them
T calls a representative to write main
information of the answer on the board.
T checks and gives feedback
After you read:Discuss the question:
T asks s to answer the following questions:
T goes around class to help them
T calls some pairs to practice
T corrects and gives feedback
III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.
Read the words and find the meaning.
Pair work:Read the definitions and find the best word
to suit.
Keys:
1. establish
2. contain
3. species
4. survival
5. sub-tropical
6. contamination
Group work
S work in groups, discuss and find out the
information.
Answers:
1. 200 square kms
2. The rain season has just finished
3. The way to recognize the different
species of plants and animals, the
habits of animals and the way for
dependent species to survive4. Orphaned and abandoned animals.
5. Because of the toxic levels of
chemicals in the water.
6. They will be killed/ destroyed.
Answer the questions in group:
Suggestions:
Cuc Phuong : To study butterflies, visit
caves, see 1000 year old tree.
-Nairobi: They go there to learn how to
recognize the different species of animals
and plants.
Prepare for Speaking lesson.
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 123/189
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK
Period 66 : Speaking
Date: ........................ A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to talk about an
excursion,, use conditional sentence (Type 3) to talk about things that
happened or couldn’t happen in the part.
2. Knowledge: Use a number of words about a village. Improve readingcomprehension skill by filling the chart and answering the questions in the reading.
3. Skill: Reading
B. METHODS: tegrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
T asks s to look at the pictures of a camping
and answer the questions:What do you think the people in the picture
are doing?
Where are they?
What did they have to prepare before
going?
Lead in new lesson
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1: Matching
The T asks the Ss to look at the chart andread the sentences, combine the things in
column B and say out the sentences.
T goes around the class to explain how to
do and help them
T explains some new words.
1. go by (bus/train/coach) (example)
2. a fine (n) (translation)
3. poisoning food (explanation)
4. luggage (n) (explanation)T calls some s to do exercises
T checks and gives feedback.
The T gives the example:
Answer the questions:
They are on a picnic/ going camping.
They are in a forest.
They had to prepare food, drinks, tents,
blankets, candles or noodles…
Group work
Look at the chart, read the given
information and tell answers.
to discuss.
Keys:
1- f 5- b
2- c 6- c
3- h 7- a
4- g 8- d
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 124/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Task 2: Making sentences:
A. I heard you went by coach so most of
them got car sick
B. If we hadn’t gone by coach, they
wouldn’t have got car sick
(or if they had gone by bikes, they wouldn’thave got car sick.)
T reviews the structure of conditional
sentence (type 3) before s practice
if + S +V (past perfect)
S + would +have +pp
The T asks the Ss to practice in pair.
The T goes around the class to help the Ss
T calls some pairs to practiceT corrects mistakes.
Task 3: Pair work
Asks the Ss to practice in pairs, using the
information in task 1 and 2.
The T goes around the class to help the Ss
T calls some pairs to practice
T corrects mistakes.
Summary: Speaking practice
III. HOMEWORK
Write the sentences in the notebook.
Listen to the teacher and study the structure
Practice the sentences.
S work in group
Discuss about what you did or did not do in
the past.
Answers:2. If we had brought enough food and drink,
we wouldn’t have spent a lot of money
eating in expensive restaurants.
3. If some of us hadn’t food poisoning, we
would have enjoyed the trip.
4. If we had had raincoats, we wouldn’t have
got wet and a cold.
5. If some of us hadn’t left luggage on the
coach, we would have had clothes and
money with us.
6. If we hadn’t thrown waste in the forest, we
wouldn’t have got a fine.
7. If we had been careful when walking in
Huong Pagoda, we wouldn’t have got lost.
8. If we had stayed there more than a day, we
would have visited all the pagodas.
A. We went by coach so most of us got
car sick.B. If we had brought enough food and
drink, we wouldn’t have spent a lot of
money eating in expensive
restaurants.
Conditional sentences, Type 3
Tell about the things did or did not happen in
the past
Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the
information in lesson. Read about Cuc
Phuong forest
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 125/189
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK
Period 67 : Listening Date: ........................
A. OBJECTIVE By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to By the end of the lesson students will
be able to listen to information of Cuc Phuong National Park and do exercises by filling in
the missing information, answering questions and summarizing the main ideas.
B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
T asks s to write the name of some National
Park in Vietnam.
-T calls a representative of group to write
the name of National Park in VN.The groupis the winner if this group write many
name.
-T leads-in new lesson: Listening
II. PRESENTATION
I. Before you listen:
T asks Ss to answer the following
questions.
-T calls a representative of each group to
answer.-T gives feedback.
*Listening and repeat: These words and
phrases appear in the listening passage
Listen and repeat after the teacher
+flora
+attack
+fauna
+enemy
+ethnic minorityT explains the new words.
S work in group
Keys:
1. Cat Ba
2. Cat Tien3. Cuc Phuong
4. Bach Ma
5. U Minh
Discuss and answer the questions.
Keys:
1. It is in the South West of HN
2. It contains over 200 square km ofrainforest.
3. It is the time when rainy season has
finished.
4. Butterflies, mountain, caves, 1000 year
old tree…..
S listen and repeat.
Read the words.
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 126/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
II. While you listen:
Task 1:
Fill in the missing information
-T asks s to read the exercise and guess the
words before listening
Ex: 1 ....in (year)
2 ....located. (number)3 ...nearly (number)
4 ...there are (number)
5 ...in (place)
T plays tape 2 times
T goes around class to help s
T checks and gives feedback
Task 2: Answering the questionsListen again and answer questions.
-T asks s to read the questions beforelistening
-T plays tape 2 times
-T goes around class to help them and check
-T calls some s to answer the questions.
-T asks s to talk about the special features of
Cuc Phuong National park.
III. After you listening :
T asks s to talk about the special features of
Cuc Phuong National park+ Cuc Phuong is the first...
+ It covers...
+ In 2002,nearly....
+ There are about....
+ Nguyen Hue’s army...
Summary:Listening about Cuc Phuong national park,
using information to fill in the blanks and
answer the questions
III. HOMEWORKSummarize the listening. Tell about Cuc
Phuong forest.
S read the exercise and guess the words.
-S listen 2 times and then work in pair
Keys:1. 1960
2. 160 km south west of
3. 100.000 visitor
4. 2000-450
5. Quen Voi before it made its...
1. It belongs to three provinces: Ninh
Binh, Hoa Binh and Thanh Hoa.
2. It is about 160 Km
3. They come there to see the workbeing done to protect endangered
species.
4. Nguyen Hue defeated the Qing
invaders in the spring of 1789.
5. They live mainly on bee keeping and
farming.
S work in groupsCuc Phuong is the first national park in Viet
Nam
+ It covers 200 square km.
+ In 2002 nearly 100,000 visitors came to it.
+ There are about 200,000 different species
of flora and 450 species of fauna.
+ Nguyen Hue’s army was stationed there
before it made surprise attack on Thang long.
Prepare lesson for Writing: Read the words
and phrases to complete the letters
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 127/189
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK
Period 68 : Writing Date: ........................
A. OBJECTIVE Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to understand the
structure (of a letter of acceptance or refusal) as well as express used in a letter of acceptance
or refusal, write completely a letter of acceptance or refusal.
B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP:
T gives out Ss an envelop and a stamp and
asks s.
1. What is that?
2. How often do you write it?
3. Who do you often write to?T leads-in new lesson: Writing
II. PRESENTATION
Task1:
Below are some common ways of accepting
or refusing an invitation
Read them and fill each of the notes with a
suitable expession
T asks Ss to read and distinguish the
structure when accepting or refusing theinvitation.
T goes around class to explain the new
words (if neccessary)
T calls Ss to write their answer on the
board.
T corrects and gives feedback.
T calls 3 Ss to read aloud the letters
Task 2: Rearrange the sentences to make
a letter:
T asks Ss to read the sentences in the bookand rearrange the following sentences to
make a letter.
S answer
1. It is a letter
2. Once a week (or somtimes)
3. I often write to my friends
Read the phrases and the letters.
S work in group to discuss and fill in the
blank.
Keys:
1. I’d like to (I’d love to)
2. I am sorry I cannot be (or I’d love to,
but)
3. I’d be delighted toRead the whole letters in front of the
classes.
S read the sentences in the book and
rearrange
S work in group
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 128/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
T explains the new words
T goes around the class to help
T asks Ss to write completely this letter
Askts two Ss to read the letter
Task 3: Write a letter:
T asks s to write a reply letter accepting or
declining his/her invitation
Let the Ss find the structure of the letter:
Accepting letter: The phrases of accepting in
task 1
Refusing letter: The phrases of refusing in
task 1
T goes around the class to help them
T calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to write
their letter on the board.
After you write:T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes and
gives marks
Summary:
Write an accepting or refusing letter.III. HOMEWORK
Summarize the reading passage.
Keys:
1. d 2. e 3. c
4. a 5. f 6. b
Read the letter and find the phrases of
acception.
Greeting
Body
Conclusion
Ending
Group work:
Discuss to write the letter
Write the letter:
1. Accepting letter
Dear……I am very happy to get your invitation to go
for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park
next week. You know, I have been looking
forward to going there but I have not got a
chance. I would really like to come. I will
meet you at your home at seven o’lock.
Thankyou very much for your invitation. See
you on Sunday
Your friend,
Lan
2. Refusing letter
Dear……
I am very happy to get your invitation to go
for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park
next week. You know, I have been looking
forward to going there but I have not got a
chance. I wish I would go with next week
but I have to go with my parents to see my
grandparents in the home village. Thankyouvary much for inviting me.
See you on Sunday
Your friend,
Lan
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 129/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 130/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
2. What would have happened if you hadn’t
gone to school yesterday?
T asks: What grammtical point we are
going to learn today?
-T presents the conditional sentence ( type
3 ):Untrue condition in the past.
Ex: if you had driven carefully, youwouldn’t have had an accident.
Exercise1: Complete the following
sentences, using the correct form of the
verbs in brackets:
T goes around class to help them
T gives example
I would have sent you a postcard if I had
had your dress
T calls some s to give their answerT corrects and gives feedback.
Exercise 2Write a sentences with if for each situation:
T explains how to do.
T goes around class to help s.
T asks some to tell their sentences.
Exercise 3:
Make conditional sentences:Asks the Ss to use given information to
make sentences.
Let the Ss to work in pairs.
The T goes around the class to help them.
Aks some to say their answer.
Summary:
Conditional sentences
III. HOMEWORK
Write the exercises in the notebooks.
Listen to the teacher
Yes, I did/No I didn’t
Conditional sentences, type 3
Form:
If + S + V(past perfect)
S + would + have +pp
S do exercise
-S work in pairs
Read the sentences and complete the spaces
Keys:1. had known 6. had known
2. had had 7. had stopped
3. would have gone 8. had called
4. would have had
5. could have enjoyed.
Make sentences, using coditional sentences,type 3.
Group work
Keys:
1. If the driver in front hadn’t stopped so
suddenly, the accidents wouldn’t have
happened.
2. If I hadn’t known that Lam had to get up
early, I wuold have woken him up.
3. If Hoa hadn’t lend me the money, I
wouldn’t have been able to buy the car.
Type 3, unreal present
Prepare for new lesson: Test yourself D
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 131/189
Period 70 : Test yourself D Date: ........................
A. OBJECTIVE Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to
Consolidate skills and knowledge studied in Units 9,10 and 11.
Remark and take notes to have the experience.
B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C.TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. listening
T asks s to read the questions before listening.
T explains the new words (if neccessary)
T plays the tape 3 times
T asks s to work in pair and discuss to answer
questions.
T calls some s to answe4 the questionsT corrects and gives feedback.
II. reading
2. T asks s to read the passage
T explains some new words.
management (n)-explanation
playground (n)-explanationinfluence(v)- example
2. T asks s to find the words or phrases which
mean following and decide whether the
following statements are T or F
T goes around to help them
T calls s to talk before the class after
discussing
T goes around to help them
T calls s to talk before the class after
discussing.
T corrects and gives feedback
S listen to the T and answer.
S read the questions
-S work in pair, listen, discuss and
answer the questions.
Keys:
1. They go to a national park to enjoynature.
2. It became a national park in 1812
3. No, it isn’t. It is the world’s largest
park
4. It has about to guess
5. They must not pick the flowers, feed
or hunt the animals.
Read the reading passage.
S work in group and discuss
Keys:
1. a. junk and litter
b. landscap
c. high way
d. healthy
2. a. T
b. T
c. F
d. F
e.T
f. T
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 132/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
III. Grammar
T asks s to put the verbs in brackets in the
correct form.
-T calls s to talk before the class
-T corrects and gives feedback
IV.writing
T asks s to complete the invitation letterbelow, using the words and phrases given
cues.
- T calls a S to write the letter on the board
and then other s comment.
-S corrects mistakes
Summary:
Test yourself:
III. HOMEWORK
Write the exercises in the notebooks.
S work in pairs to discuss about the answer.
Keys:
a. has been cleaned
have been turned on
are waiting
b. knew....would help...knowsc. decided...to stay
would have gone out...
hadn’t been
S work in group
One S goes to the blackboard to write the
letter
Write the letter of invitation:Suggested answer:
Dear Alex, You will be happy to know
Father is giving a party to celebrate the New
Year. He has invited some of our relatives
and his friends to make theparty a success.
I have invited a number of my friends in the
neibourhood. Mother has asked me to tell
you to come home for the New Year
celebration.
I’m suer you will be here in time to shre thefun with us on that day.
Love,
Helen
Listening, reading, writing, grammar.
Prepare for new lesson: Test 45min.
UNIT 11 NATIONAL PARK Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 133/189
UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 72 : Reading
Date: …………………………….
A. OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to understand and talk about the
importance of music in our life,use the new words, listen and write about a famous
composer of Viet Nam
B. METHODS: ntergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Asks s to look at 3 pictures in text book .
a.What do the people in the pictures do?
b.What kind of music does she play in the
first picture?
c.What banks in the second picture?
d. What kind of music do they play?
II. PRESENTATION
Before you read:
Net work.
Give a poster in which.
1..........is traditional soups of a country.
2. .........is a style of music with a strong and
loud beat.
3. ......... is a modern music that is popular
with young people.
4. ......... is combination of African and
western music.
5. .......... is serious and traditional Western
European music.+Asks s to complete.
Open their book and answer.
-They play...
-Folk music.
-Rock’n roll.
+List
-Folk music
-Pop music
-Jazz music
-Classical music
complete the sentences in the net
1. Folk music
2.Rock’n roll music
3. Pop music
4. Jazz music
5. Classical music
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
music
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 134/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
While you read:
Task 1: Find the word for definition:
Let s listen to the tape carefully.
-Asks s to find out the words which have in
the box.
Asks Ss to read the sentences and complete.
Calls s to read their exercise.
Corrects (if neccessary)
Task 2: Answer the questions:
Asks the Ss to work in group, read the
passage to get the information.Answer the
questions.
Asks Ss to read the questions
Calls Ss to work in pair
T goes around class to help them
T calls a representative to write main
information of the answer on the board.
T checks and gives feedback
After you read:
Discuss the question:
T asks s to answer the following questions:
T goes around class to help them
T calls some pairs to practice
T corrects and gives feedback
IV. HOMEWORK Summarize the reading passage.
listen to the tape carefully and repeat silently
Work in pair
Compare and copy the key down.
Keys: 1. communicate
2. lull
3. delight
4. intergral part
5. soleum
6. emotion
7. mournful
Read the questions then read the passage
again and answer by themselves
Keys:1. language and music
2. It can express ideas, thoughts and
feelings
3. It adds yoyfulness to the atmosphere
of a festival and made a funeral more
solemn and mournful/
4. It makes people happy and excited. Its
delights the sence.
5. It is a billion-dollar industry.
Pair work work
S work in pairs, discuss and find out the
information.
Answers:
1. Five roles
2. The 1st
3.
The 2
nd
…..
Prepare for new lesson: Speaking
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 135/189
UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 73 : Speaking
Date: …………………………….
A. OBJECTIVE: 1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to talk about the
favorite music, the reason and singer, compare one’s hobby and others, and
pronunciate correctly
B. METHODS: Integrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
i. WARM UPT asks Ss to to close the book.
-asks s to listen music in the song
“Yesterday”-asks s to answer the questions.
1.What song is it?
2.Who sings this song?
3. Do you like this boy band?
Lead in new lesson
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1: Matching
The T asks the Ss to read the paragraph,
gives the requirement of exercise.
Note: The main words in the sentences.
Eg: cheer (someone) up
keep (someone) happy
have the radio on
be easy to listen
Asks the Ss to work in pairs
T checks Ss’answers.
Has the Ss to tell their answers
Task 2:
-T writes down the suggested words .
-T asks ss to work in pair and makequestions.
Rousing/lyrical/serene and peaceful/
pleasant
Help (sb) forget troubles
Make (sb) feel relaxed
Answer the questions:
Work individually and answer the
questions.
It is “Yesterday”
The Bettles
Yes, I do
Ss work in pair and finish the task of
exercise.
Ss practice reading conversation in pair
Ss practice making questions and
answering.
Answers:
1. She likes pop music.
2. Because it keeps her happy.
3. The Backstreet Boys.
4. All the time
Close the book.
Ss work in pair.
Answer.
A. What kind of music do you like?
B. I like …………..
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 136/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
The Ss to tell their ideas about :
Kind of music
Favourite band or singer.
Favourite song.
The time to listen to music.
The reason to listen to music.
Task 3: Telling your friend’s ideas:
Asks the Ss to tell their friends’ ideas
Summary: Speaking practice
IV. HOMEWORK: Write a paragraph of about 50 words about
music in the notebook.
Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the
sentences in task 2
……… Folk music
Rock’n roll music
Pop music
Jazz music
Classical music
A. Why do you like it?
B.
Because it is rousingLyrical
serene and peaceful
pleasant
2. A. What is your favourite band?
B. I like ………..
A. Why do you like it ?
B. Because……………..
3. A. When do you usually listen to music?
B. I usually listen when I am free/ after
work/ in the evening……4. A. What is the reasons for listening to
music?
B. I listen to music for relaxing…….
Tell the ideas you hear:
1. Nam likes classical music because it
is serene and peaceful.
2. Both An and Hoa like pop music
because it makes them excited.
3. Lan likes rock and rolls because it is
rousing4. Thanh likes Backtreet Boy because
they are a good band.
5. Tam like Hong Nhung because she
sings beautifully.
6. Every body likes music
Write homework
Prepare for new lesson: Listening:
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 137/189
UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 74 : Listening
Date: …………………………….
A. OBJECTIVE: By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and choose the true and false
information, ask and answer the information, summarize the main ideas and practice skills of
talking and writing.
B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
i. WARM UP
*Play game: Net work
-what kind of music do you know?
-T leads-in new lesson: Listening
II. PRESENTATION
Before you listen:
Vocabulary
-write some adj on board
Rousing
Lyrical
serene and peaceful
pleasant
sweet
gentle
exciting..Asks the Ss to read the adj.
Ask s to open the book to selects some adj
to describle Van Cao’s music.
Play the tape or pronounce adj above.
find down some kinds of music
-go to board and write down
copy down
S listen and repeat.
Read the words.
Select the adj
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
pop azz
Music
rock folk
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 138/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
Aasks s to work in groups then ask your
partner questions to get information to
complete the table below using suitable adj
While you listen:
Task 1: T/F statementsSets situations and explains the way how to
do.
Pays the tape.
Asks s who can answer?
Plays the tape again
Asks to work individually then discuss
Checks the answer
Plays the tape once more
Stops playing the tape at the correct
sentence.
Task 2: Answering the questionsSets situations and explains the way how to
do.
Plays the tape
Asks Ss who can answer?
Plays the tape again
Asks to work in pairs and answer the
questions.
After you listening :T asks s to talk about Quang Hung’s ideas
Van Cao music.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks some Ss to tell their ideas.
Summary:
Listening about Van Cao, one of the most
talented musician in Viet Nam.
IV. HOMEWORK: Summarize the listening. Tell about Van Cao
music.
Work in pairs.
Select the adj which suit the songs.
Keys:
1. Ngay mua->sweet,gentle, exciting
2. Truong Chi:->lyrical
3. Ben Xuan:-> sweet,gentle,lyrical4. Mua Xuan dau tien:exciting,lyrical
5. Truong ca song lo:rousing,solemn
Listen to the tapes
Choose true/false
Work individual and in pairs
Answers:
1.F 2.F
3.T 4.F 5.F
Listen and answer
Listen to the tape
Work in pairs and answer
Keys
1. It is “ My favourite musician”
2. Tien Quan Ca.
3. It is hard and solemn, it makes him
feel great and proud of his country.
Quang hung thinks Van Cao’ music is sweet
and gentle. Sometimes they are lyrical. Tien
Quan Ca is hard and solemn.
I agree with him
I don’t agree with him.
Prepare lesson for Writing: Read the words
and phrases to complete the letters
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 139/189
UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 75 : Writing
Date: …………………………….
A. OBJECTIVE: Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to understand write
about a famous person’s background, write about an American musician and a well-known
musician in Vietnam.
B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
T gives out Ss an envelop and a stamp and
asks s.
1. What is that?
2. How often do you write it?3. Who do you often write to?
T leads-in new lesson: Writing
II. PRESENTATION
Task1:
Below are some common ways of accepting
or refusing an invitation
Read them and fill each of the notes with a
suitable expession
T asks Ss to read and distinguish the
structure when accepting or refusing the
invitation.
T goes around class to explain the new
words (if neccessary)
T calls Ss to write their answer on the
board.
T corrects and gives feedback.
T calls 3 Ss to read aloud the letters
Task 2: Rearrange the sentences to make
a letter:
T asks Ss to read the sentences in the bookand rearrange the following sentences to
make a letter.
S answer
1. It is a letter
2. Once a week (or somtimes)
3. I often write to my friends
Read the phrases and the letters.
S work in group to discuss and fill in the
blank.
Keys:
1. I’d like to (I’d love to)
2. I am sorry I cannot be (or I’d love to,
but)
3. I’d be delighted to
Read the whole letters in front of the
classes.
S read the sentences in the book and
rearrangeS work in group
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 140/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
T explains the new words
T goes around the class to help
T asks Ss to write completely this letter
Askts two Ss to read the letter
Task 3: Write a letter:
T asks s to write a reply letter accepting ordeclining his/her invitation
Let the Ss find the structure of the letter:
Accepting letter: The phrases of accepting in
task 1
Refusing letter: The phrases of refusing in
task 1
T goes around the class to help them
T calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to write
their letter on the board.
After you write:
T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes andgives marks
Summary: Write an accepting or refusing letter.
IV. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.
Keys:
1. d 2. e 3. c
4. a 5. f 6. b
Read the letter and find the phrases of
acception.
GreetingBody
Conclusion
Ending
Group work:
Discuss to write the letter
Write the letter:
1. Accepting letterDear……
I am very happy to get your invitation to gofor a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park
next week. You know, I have been looking
forward to going there but I have not got a
chance. I would really like to come. I will
meet you at your home at seven o’lock.
Thankyou very much for your invitation. See
you on Sunday
Your friend,
Lan
2. Refusing letter
Dear……
I am very happy to get your invitation to go
for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park
next week. You know, I have been looking
forward to going there but I have not got a
chance. I wish I would go with next week
but I have to go with my parents to see my
grandparents in the home village. Thankyou
vary much for inviting me.
See you on Sunday
Your friend,
Lan
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 141/189
UNIT 12 MUSIC Period 76 : Language focus
Date: …………………………….
A. OBJECTIVE: Educational aims:By the end of the lesson students will be able to understand
recognize an pronounce two sounds:/ s / and /z/, review the use of “to infinitive” and “wh-
questions, practise reading, speaking, listening, writing, the impotance of music and use the
new words, talk and ask,answer about activities.
B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Listen and gives correct answers: /s/:1, /z/:2Play the tapes.
1.Susan loves classical music
1 2 2 1 2
2.I like to listen to Jazz records
1 2 2
Lead to new lesson.
II. PRESENTATION
1. Pronunciation
T presents 2 sounds /s/, /z/
1. Has s open their book
Turns on the cassette for Ss to listen to two
consonants /s/ and /z/.
Asks them to repeat
Asks some Ss to read
corrects if they can’t pronounce clearly
between /s/ and /z/.
2. Lets them work in pair and practice six
sentences in the book, page 130.
Help s read them correctly word by word andthen read the whole sentence.
3. Practice these sentences.
T asks Ss to listen and pick out the words
containing the sound /s/, /z/
S listen to the T and answer.The sounds /s/ and /z/
Number the sounds
Listen to the tape and repeat.
Stand up and read.
Pay attention to the teacher
Ss work in pairs
Practice all those sentences
Read word by word and then read whole
sentence.
S listen and repeat the words
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 142/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
T calls some Ss to read that sentences.
T corrects pronunciation.
2. Grammar
1.To infinitive
Exercise1:Asks s to use the words in brackets to
answer the questions.
+what do you listen to music for?
(feel relaxed)
->To feel relaxed, I listen to music.
or: I listen to music to feel relaxed
Asks them to do the exercise individual
first and then work in group to discuss
correct answer.
Checks and gives correct answers.Exercise2.
Asks s to complete each sentence with the
right form of a suitable verb.
Gives a model sentence.
we are having a party...
Ann’s birthday -> we are having a party to
celebrate Ann’s birthday.
Asks them to work individually and
then work in groups to discuss right
answer.Goes around class to help if possible.
Checks and gives correct answers.
Exercise3:
Has Ss to put questions for the underlined
words/phrases
Gives a model first
I often listen to music whenever I have free
time.
When do you listen to music?
Asks Ss to work individually then work ingroups.
Checks and gives correct answer
Summary:
IV. HOMEWORK: Write the exercises in the notebooks.
Do as teacher request.
Work in group and discuss.
Use a suitable verb to complete each
sentence.Keys:
1. I phoned her to tell her the good
news.
2. I’m saving money to buy a cassette
player.
3. She practises singing all day to win
the singing contest.
4. I’m learning French to sing …
5. The monitor always goes to class on
time to test… Do as teacher request.
Work in group and discuss.
Use a suitable verb to complete each
sentence.
Keys:
1. to read
2. to buy
3. to post
4. to invite
5. to learn
Keys:
1. What will you do if it rains?
2. What sorts of music does….?
3. When did he leave ……..…?
4. Who wants to talk to you?
5. How did you ………………?
6. When does the film start?
7. Who is your favourite musician?
8.
Why do you like pop music?
To infinitives
Wh- questions
Prepare for lesson 13
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 143/189
Period 70 : Test yourself D
Date: ………………
A. OBJECTIVE: Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to
Consolidate skills and knowledge studied in Units 9,10 and 11.
Remark and take notes to have the experience.
B. METHODS: Intergrated, mainly communicative approaching. C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects. D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
I. LISTENING
T asks s to read the questions before listening.
T explains the new words (if neccessary)
T plays the tape 3 times
T asks s to work in pair and discuss to answerquestions.
T calls some s to answe4 the questions
T corrects and gives feedback.
II. REEADING
2. T asks s to read the passage
T explains some new words.management (n)-explanation
playground (n)-explanation
influence(v)- example
2. T asks s to find the words or phrases which
mean following and decide whether the
following statements are T or F
T goes around to help them
T calls s to talk before the class after
discussingT goes around to help them
T calls s to talk before the class after
discussing.
T corrects and gives feedback
S listen to the T and answer.
S read the questions
-S work in pair, listen, discuss and
answer the questions.Keys:
1. They go to a national park to enjoy
nature.
2. It became a national park in 1812
3. No, it isn’t. It is the world’s largest
park
4. It has about to guess
5. They must not pick the flowers, feed
or hunt the animals.
Read the reading passage.S work in group and discuss
Keys:
1. a. junk and litter
b. landscap
c. high way
d. healthy
2. a. Tb. T
c. F
d. F
e.T
f. T
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 144/189
TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES
III. GRAMMAR
T asks s to put the verbs in brackets in the
correct form.
-T calls s to talk before the class
-T corrects and gives feedback
IV. WRITING
T asks s to complete the invitation letterbelow, using the words and phrases given
cues.
- T calls a S to write the letter on the board
and then other s comment.
-S corrects mistakes
Summary:
Test yourself:
HOMEWORK
Write the exercises in the notebooks.
S work in pairs to discuss about the answer.
Keys:
a. has been cleaned
have been turned on
are waiting
b. knew....would help...knowsc. decided...to stay
would have gone out...
hadn’t been
S work in group
One S goes to the blackboard to write the
letter
Write the letter of invitation:Suggested answer:
Dear Alex, You will be happy to know
Father is giving a party to celebrate the New
Year. He has invited some of our relatives
and his friends to make theparty a success.
I have invited a number of my friends in the
neibourhood. Mother has asked me to tell
you to come home for the New Year
celebration.
I’m suer you will be here in time to shre thefun with us on that day.
Love,
Helen
Listening, reading, writing, grammar.
Prepare for new lesson: Test 45min.
UNIT 12 MUSIC
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 145/189
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 78 : Reading
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand the content of the text
and use the new words and the important role of cinema in our life, talk and ask, answer
about activities of the brief history of cinema.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
T shows a photo of a local cinema and ask s
questions.
1.What is it?
2. Have you ever been here?3.What do you come here for?
4.What film did you see?
5.What kind of film is it?
II. PRESENTATION
Before you read:Ask s to work in groups to match the titles
of the films (column A) and the kinds of the
films (column B)
A B1.Tom and Jerry a. comedies
2.Sherlock Holmes b. war films
3. Dien Bien Phu c. sciencwe fiction
4. Charlie chaplin d. cartoons
5. Stars war e. detectives
6. Titanic f. action films
7. Kung-Fu g. Love stories
8. Dracular h. Horrors
Check the answers of the groups and give
feedback.Ask s to repeat the kinds of films (in
English)
Ask Ss to open their books and silently read
the text following to the cassette.
Look at the photo and answer the
questions.
Answers may vary
Ss do the task and give their answers.
Copy the answers on their notebooks1. d 5. c
2. e 6. g
3. b 7. f
4. a 8. h
Repeat after the teacher
Work in pairs to do the task.
Read the text following to the cassette
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 146/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Vocabulary:
cinema (n)-give examples
still (adj) –explain
movement (n)-show an action
character (n)-explain
play (adv)-explainHave the Ss read the words.
While you read:
Task 1: Find the word for definition:
Asks Ss to find the words in the passage that
can match with the definition on the right
column
Help Ss and check their answers.
Task 2: Answer the questions:Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs to
answer the questions in task 2-textbook.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class.
Task : Find the title for the reading
passage
Asks s to work in group and choose the best
title for the passage.
Help s and check their answers.
T goes around class to help them
T asks the Ss to say their answer.
After you read:Ask the Ss to summarize the text
T goes around class to help them
T calls some pairs to practice
T corrects and gives feedback
III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.
Look at their books and repeat after the
cassette once.
-Take note and repeat the words after the
teacher.
Do the task in pairs.
Give cprrect answers
Keys:
1. cinema
2. sequence
3. decade
4. rapidly
5. scence6. character
Read the reading passage, then work in pairs
to ask and answer the questions.
Keys:
1. The history of cinema began in the earlt
19th
century.
2. At that times scientists discovered that
when a sequence of still pictures were set in
motion, they could give the feeling ofmovement.
3. No, they didn’t.
4. Audiences were able to see long films in
the early 1910s
5. The sound was introduced at the end of
the 1920s.
6. As the old silent films were being replaced
by spoken ones, the musical cinema
appeared.
Work in group to summsrize the text
Summarize the reading passage in notebook.
Prepare for new lesson: Speaking
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 147/189
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 79 : Speaking
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to make
questions the information about their preferences for films, talk about different types of
films and pronunciate correctly.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Asks s to close your books and look at the
chart. Name some kinds of film you have
learnt in reading.
-How much do you like each kind of film?Why?
T leads in new lesson: Speaking
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1: Tick your choice
Asks s to look at the table and work with
your partner. Put a tick (v) in the right
column. Then compare your answer with
your partner.
Asks some pairs to speak their ideas andpartners about kinds of film mentioned in
the table before the class.
Ex. I like science films very much
Ss go to the board and do as direct.
Cartoon
FictionDetective
Horror
Thriller…
Very much/ not muchThey are exciting/ funny/ happy….
Work in pairs. Each s puts a tick in the
right column. Then compare.
Express their ideasThe answers may be different.
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
Film
fictioncartoon
horrordetectiv
thriller
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 148/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 149/189
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 80 : Listening
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and
understand the information about the plan in the next week of Lan Huong, fill in the
information in the blank and summarize the main ideas, practice skills of talking and
writing.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I.WARM UPT asks s to close the book and work in
groups to write down some activities in
free time.*Things to do in free time.
T checks before the class.
T calls s to answer.
T lead-in Things to do in our free time.
II. PRESENTATION
1. Before you listen:
Activity 1:
T asks s to open the book and fill in things
to do in free time in the chartT gives questions and asks s to answer.
Activity 2:
T asks s to listen and repeat the words in
listen and repeat.
Titanic
cinema
instead
suppose
guesspicnic
2. While you listen:
Task 1: What are they planning to do?
T gives situations and explains
Ss work in groups.
Ss answer.
Going shoppingWatching TV
Reading books
Listen to music …
S open the book and fill
-S answer.
I often/ always/ never go to the cinema(
watch T.V, listen to the radio, go dancing,
cat on the net…)
Listen to the teachers and repeat the
words.
S listen and repeat.
Read the words.
Plans for the whole week.
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 150/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
T asks s to listen to the first time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the second time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the third time
T pauses to checks Ss’ answer.
Task 2: Answering the questionsT gives situations and explains
T asks s to look at the calendar and listen to
the first time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the second time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the third time
T pauses to checks answer.
Task 3: Comparing the answer
T asks Ss to compare their answer with the
classmate.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
3. After you listen :T gives situations and explains
T asks s to work in groups to talk again
about the plan of Lan and Huong in next
week .
Summary:
Listening the plan of Lan and Huong in next
week .
III. HOMEWORK: Write about Lan and Huong plan next week.
Tell the timme they can go to the cinema
together.
T asks s to rewrite your plan in week.
Prepare for new lesson:
Ss listen and take notes
the activities of Lan and Huong
Listen and answer
Listen to the tape
Work in pairs and answer: They are going tosee the film Titanic together.
Ss look at the chart and take notes.
Mon: Lan is seeing a play in the morning
Tue. They are free
Wed. Huong is working and going to the
singing club
Thur. Lan is visit her granparents in the
morning
Fri. Huong is studying ChineseSat. Lan is working
Sun. Huong is going on a picnic.
Ss look at the chart to check the answer.
Ss compare their answer with the classmate.
Aswer:
They can meet on Tuesday.
Work in group and talk about Lan and
Huong plan
S listen to the T and take notes.
Read the description of the film Titanic, then
use structure to write about a film you have
ever seen
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 151/189
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 81 : Writing
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to widen their
knowledge of film and music, improve writing and speaking skills.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Play the game:
Guessing the name of a film.
-T asks s to go to the board and tell the
content of a film . She (he) has just watched
without mentioning its name. The others
guess its name.T leads-in new lesson: Writing
II. PRESENTATION
Discussion
T asks s to discuss about the picture in their
book.
In what film does the ship appear?
Who are they?
Matching
-T gives the poster with these words andasks s to match A and B
A B
1.liner a. thảm họa, tai họa
2.disater b. chuyến đi xa
3.iceberg c. tàu thủy
4.voyage d. núi băng trôi
Task1: Read the passage and answer the
questions.
-Asks s to read the discription of the filmTitanic and then work in pairs, answering
the questions.
-Calls some pairs to answer the questions.
Play the game.
Listen to the Teacher and guess the name
of the film
Discuss about the picture
Titanic film
They are the main characters in Titanic
film
Look at the poster to match A with B
Read the words
Read the passage and answer the
questions.
Expected answers:
1.
Titanic2. Love story
3. About two lovers who first met on
board
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 152/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
T elicits some questions to help and give the
outline used to describle a film.
title of film where set in
kind of film what based on
content main character
ending
Task 2: Write about a film you have seen.T devides class into 5 groups and asks each
group to give a film they like best and gets
each group discuss about the film using the
description of Titanic.
Goes around to see how Ss discuss and help
if necessary.
-Asks Ss to write about the film that they
have discussed (using poster to write)T goes around the class to help them
T calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to write
their letter on the board.
After you write:
Ask s to exchange their writing to the other
groups to read and correct mistakes.
-T can choose 1 or 2 writing posters to
correct to the class.
T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes andgives marks
Summary: Write about a film you have seen.
III. HOMEWORK: Write about a film you have seen in your
notebooks.
Prepare for new lesson: Language focus.
4. In America
5. On a true story of the Titanic disaster.
6. Jack Dawson and Rose De Bukater
are.
7. The man died from the chill, the
woman refused to marry the man she
had engaged with.8. a sad/ unhappy ending
Ss work in groups ,discussing the film use
the description of Titanic.
Ss work in groups , writing about their film
on the poster.
1. Recently I have seen……
2. It is a ………….. film
3. It is about …………..
4. It was made in ……..
5. It is based on ……….
6. ……….7. He / she is ……….
8. ……….
Write about a film we have ever seen.
Write homework in the notebooks
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 153/189
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA Period 82 : Language focus
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
Educational aims:By the end of the lesson students will be able torecognize,
understand and pronounce two sounds:/ v / and /f /, review the use of –ed and –ing adj,
practising the structure It was not untill that ……….
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Listen to the T and put the words in correct
group: four
EnoughVine
View
give
Lead to new lesson.
II. PRESENTATION
1. PronunciationT presents 2 sounds /f/, /v/
1. Has th Ss open their books
Turns on the cassette for Ss to listen to twoconsonants /s/ and /z/.
Asks them to repeat
Asks some Ss to read
corrects if they can’t pronounce clearly
between /f/ and /v/.
2. Lets them work in pair and practice six
sentences in the book.
Help s read them correctly word by word and
then read the whole sentence.3. Practice these sentences.
T asks Ss to listen and pick out the words
containing the sound /v/, /f/
S listen to the T and answer.
Four / enough
Vine / view / give
The sounds /f/ and /v/
Listen to the tape and repeat.
Stand up and read.
Pay attention to the teacher
Ss work in pairs
Practice all those sentences
Read word by word and then read whole
sentence.
S listen and repeat the words
UNIT 13 FILM AND CINEMA
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 154/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 155/189
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Period 83 : Reading Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary by matching
the column, scan for specific information by gap-fill and decide True or False statement.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UPAsks the Ss to answer the questions:
What colour of these national football
teams?
England?
Brazil?
France?Viet Nam?
Ireland
II. PRESENTATION
I. Before you read:
Ask s to work in groups to answer the
questions.
Give some more questions.
Who is the man with the cup?What his number?
Vocabulary:Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then show
the new words.
Explain new words:
Passionate(adj) -> passion
Witness (v)
champion(n) -> championship (n)
compete (v) -> competitiongovern(v) -> government (n)
title(n)
honour (adj)
Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus and
individually.
Answers the teachar’s questions:
White
Yellow and green
BlueRed
Green
Ss do the task and give their answers.
1. In Japan and Korea.
2. Brazil
3. Germany
He is Cafu, the captain of Brazil
Number two.
Look at their books and repeat after the
cassette once.
Take note and repeat the words after the
teacher.
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 156/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
II. While you read:
Task 1: Matching A with B
Let the Ss read the words and combine them.
Task 2: Fill in the blanks:
Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs to
complete the gaps
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks some pairs to ask and answer in front of
the class.
Task : True / false statementsAsks s to work in group and choose the best
choice for the statements.
T goes around class to help them
T asks the Ss to say their answer.
III. After you read:
Ask the Ss to talk about the mentioned events
T goes around class to help them
T calls some pairs to practice
T corrects and gives feedback
III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.
Read the reading passage and give correct
answer.
Keys:
1- b
2- c3- a
4- e
5- d
Read the reading passage, then work in pairs
to fill in the blanks
Expected answers:
1. 13
2. 323. Argentina
4. one
5. 26
Work in pair to choosee T or F
Expected answers:
1. F ( 1930)
2. F (4 years)
3. T
4. T5. F (5 times)
1. the year when FIFA was set up
2. The number of teams taking part in 1st
W.C
3. The year of 1st WC
4. The number of WCT by 2002
5. The year when Wcwas held jointly
Work in group to summsrize the text
Summarize the reading passage in notebook.
Prepare for new lesson: Speaking
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 157/189
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Period 84 : Speaking
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to make
questions and answer about the World Cup and about the World Cup winners.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Asks s to close their books names some
national teams which came to Korea and
Japan to join final round of 2002 World
Cup.
T leads in new lesson: Speaking
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1: International football team
Asks s to look at the picture and work with
their partner. Tell the name of the teams
and any thing they know about them.
Asks some pairs to tell their answer.
Task 2: The World Cup1. T asks some pairs to read aloud the
dialogue model.
T asks Ss to work in pairs.
2. The T asks the Ss to look at the table of
the World Cup and use the information to
make diologue about them.
Ss go to the board and do as direct.
Brazil
England
Germany
FranceItalia
…………..
The national teams which came to Korea
and Japan to join final round of 2002
World Cup:
England
France
ItaliaGermany
Look at the table.
Ask and answer about the World Cup.
A. Where was the 2nd
WC held?
B. It was held in Italy
A. Which team played in the final
match?
B. Italy and CzechoslovakiaA. Which team became tha champion?
B. Italy
A. What was the score of the match?
B. 2-1
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 158/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Task 3: Telling about the winners of WC:Asks the Ss to read the example, then use the
information in the chart to tell about world
cup winners.
Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.T asks some pairs to tell their work in front
of the class.
1. The first World Cup
2. The second World Cup
3. The third World Cup
4. The fourth World Cup
5. The six World Cup
6. The 16th World Cup
7. The 17th World Cup
Summary: Speaking practice
Making questions and answer about the
World Cup and about the World Cup
winners.
III. HOMEWORK: Write task 3 in your notebook
Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the
sentences in listening lesson.
Ss listen to the teacher.
Ss work in groups.
Ss make similar dialogues using the
information in the chart
1. The second World Cup was held in Italyin 1934. The final match was between Italy
and Czechoslovakia. Italy defeated
Czechoslovakia by 2 to 1.
2. The third World Cup was held in Italy
1938. The final match was between Italy and
Hungary . Italy defeated Hungaryby 4 to 2.
3. The fourth World Cup was held in Brazil
in 1938. The final match was between Brazil
and Uruguay. Uruguay Brazil by 2 to 1.
4. The fifth World Cup was held inSwitzeland in 1950. The final match was
between West Germany and Hungary. West
Germany defeated Hungary by 3 to 2.
5. The sixth World Cup was held in Sweden
in 1954. The final match was between Brazil
and Sweden. Brazil defeated Sweden by 5 to
12
6. The sixteenth World Cup was held in
France in 1998. The final match wasbetween Brazil and Brazil. France defeated
Brazil by 3 to 0
7. The seventeenth World Cup was held in
South Korea and Japan in 2002. . The final
match was between Brazil and Germany.
Brazil defeated Germany by 2 to 0
Write homework
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 159/189
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUPPeriod 85 : Listening
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and
understand the information about Pele, one of the most talanted fooballer in the world, fill
in the chart and answer the questions about himB. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
the book and work in groups to write down
some famous footballers in the world
T calls Ss to answer.
T lead-in listening lesson.
II. PRESENTATION
1. Before you listen:
Activity 1:
T asks s to open the book, work in group ,
look at the picture and answer the
questions.
Who are they?
Who do you like best?
Why do you like him?T gives questions and asks s to answer.
Activity 2:
T asks s to listen and repeat the words in
listen and repeat.
Goal – score hero ambassador
Brazil kicking retirement
Promotion championship
2. While you listen:
Task 1: Filling the chartT asks the Ss to listen to the tapes and fill in
the chart information about Pele, a famous
Brazilian football player
Ss work in groups.
Pele
Charton Bobby
Klingsman
Van BastenRonaldo
Look at the picture, work in group and
asnwer the questions
Expected answers:
They are Pele (Brazil)
Maradona (Brazil)Didan (France0
Bathez (France)
David Beckham (England)
I like …. best because he is a talanted
players.
Listen to the teachers and repeat the
words.
S listen and repeat.
Read the chart.Listen and fill in the chart
Ss listen and take notes
Tell their answer.
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 160/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
T asks s to listen to the first time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the second time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the third time
T pauses to checks Ss’ answer.
Task 2: Answering the questionsT gives situations and explains
T asks Ss to look at the chart, then listen to
the first time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the second timeT checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the third time
T pauses to checks answer.
3. After you listen :
T gives situations and explains
T asks Ss to to work in groups to talk about
the milestones in Pele’s life
Summary:
Listening about Pele, one of the most famous
footballer in the world.
III. HOMEWORK:Prepare for new lesson:
Expected answers:
1. 1940
2. Joined a Brazilian football club
3. 1962
4. 1974
5. retiredSs look at the chart and take notes.
Ss look at the chart to check their answer.
Ss listen to the tapes and answer the
questions.
Expexted answers:
1. As a football player, Pele was famous
for his powerful kicking and
controlling the ball
2. He participated in three World Cup.3. He played for an Americanfootball
club before he retired.
4. He became an interenational
ambassador for the sport, working to
promote peace and understangding
through friendly sport activities.
Ss compare their answer with the classmate.
Work in groups to talk about the milestones
in Pele’s life
Pele is one of the greatest footballer in the
world. He was born in 1940 in Brazil. As a
football player, he was famous for his
powqerful kicking and controlling the ball.
He participated in three World Cup in 1958,
1962 and 1970. By 1974, hw had scored
1,200 goals and became a Brazilian hero. He
played for an American football club before
he retired in 1977. He became an an
interenational ambassador for the
sportworking to promote peace and
understangding through friendly sport
activities.
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 161/189
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUPPeriod 86 : Writing
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to write an
announcement by reading a sample and using given information in their book
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Asks the Ss to work in group and
answer the questions:
Can you tell some of national football
championships?
Which team is the champion of
Premiership?
Which team is the champon of the V-
league?
II. PRESENTATION
Task1: Discussion
Read the passage and answer the questions.
T asks s to read the anouncement in theirbook and answer the questions.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks the Ss to answer in front of the class.
Correct information.
Notes:To write an announcement ( of a match),
there are some main information to pay
attention to. What are they?
Ask the Ss to give their answers
Listen to the Teacher and tell some of
national football championships:
Primiership (England)
Budesliga (Germany)_
Seria A(Italy)V-league (Viet Nam)
Man.U
Binh Duong
Read the anouncement in their book and
answer the questions.
Expected answers:
1. The national football championship
organizing committee
2. The match beetween Nam Dinh and
Binh Duong
3. Sunday, April 18th
4. My Dinh National Stadium
Discuss and give answer to the T’s
Questions
Who write the announcement?
What is the announcement about?
When will the event be taken place?
Where will the event be taken place?
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 162/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 163/189
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUPPeriod 87 : Language focus
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
Educational aims:By the end of the lesson students will be able torecognize,
understand and pronounce two sounds:/ g / and / k /, review the use of Will vs Going to,
Will is used to make predictions and offers
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Listen to the T and put the words in correct
group:
Cup cinema because club
Game dog
Lead to new lesson.
II. PRESENTATION
1. Pronunciation
T presents 2 sounds /g/, /k/
1. Has th Ss open their books
Turns on the cassette for Ss to listen to two
consonants /g/ and /k/.
Asks them to repeatAsks some Ss to read
corrects if they can’t pronounce clearly
between /g/ and /k/.
2. Lets them work in pair and practice six
sentences in the book.
Help s read them correctly word by word and
then read the whole sentence.
3. Practice these sentences.T asks Ss to listen and pick out the words
containing the sound /g/, /k/
S listen to the T and answer.
The sounds /g/ and /k/
Listen to the tape and repeat.
Stand up and read.
Pay attention to the teacher
Ss work in pairs
Practice all those sentences
Read word by word and then read whole
sentence.
S listen and repeat the wordsPick out them
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUP
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 164/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 165/189
UNIT 14 THE WORLD CUPPeriod 88 : Test yourself e
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to consolidate skills
and knowledge studied in Units 12, 13,14
Practice reading, listening skills and grammar exercises
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. Listening
T asks s to read the questions before listening.
T explains the new words (if neccessary)
T plays the tape 3 times
T asks s to work in pair and discuss to answerquestions.
T calls some s to answe4 the questions
T corrects and gives feedback.
II. Reading
T asks the Ss to read the passage
T explains some new words.
Extra (adj) = added
Involve + v-ing
Associate (v)T asks s to work in pair to answer the
questions
T goes around to help them
T calls s to talk before the class after
discussing
T goes around to help them
T calls s to talk before the class after
discussing.
T corrects and gives feedback
III. Grammar
1. Articles:
The T asks the Ss to use correct article to
complete the spaces:
Ss listen to the T and answer.
Ss read the questions
Ss work in pair, listen, discuss and
answer the questions.
Keys:1. 845
2. students
3. MOUNTAIN
4. are reduced
5. 7 - 30
Read the reading passage.
S work in group and discuss
Keys:1. She / he has to do a lot of practice
and often spends a Sartuday or
Sunday away from home.
2. They are often played on
Sartuday and Sunday.
3. To play against other school team
4. No. Sometimes parents, friends
and other students will travel with
them.
5.
The whole school does.
Expected answers:1. no article
TEST YOURSELF E
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 166/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
2. Rewrite the sentences:
Structure to use: To + V (purpose)The T has the Ss to read the sentences, then
use To + v to rewrite them.
Asks the Ss to work in pairs
T goes around to help them
T calls s to talk before the class after
discussing.
T corrects and gives feedback
IV.writing
Writing an announcementThe T asks the Ss to read the given
information.
Disscuss the questions:
1. Who is the announcer?
2. What is the announcement about?
3. Where will the musical performance
held?
4. When will it be held?
Then asks them to write an announcement.
- T calls a S to write the letter on the boardand then other s comment.
-S corrects mistakes
Summary:
Test yourself:
IV. homework:
Write the exercises in the notebooks.
3. the 7. the
4. No 8. the
5. no 9. the
6. the 10. a
7. a
Expected answers:1. ………..to watch a film on television.
2. ……….. to thank them for the weekend.
3. ……….. to study engineering.
4. ……….. to improve your English.
5. ……….. to see that football match.
S work in group
The monitor of class 10G
The musical performance to raise money for
the people in flooded ares
At the School Hall
At 7.30 on Thursday.
One S goes to the blackboard to write the
anouncement.
Suggested answer:
The monitor of 10G class wishes to
announce that the musical performance of
class 10G to raise money for the people in
the flooded ares will be held at 7.30 p.m on
Thursday in the school meeting hall. The
ticket price is 5,000VND
Listening, reading, writing, grammar.
Prepare for new lesson: Test 45min.
TEST YOURSELF E
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 167/189
TEST YOURSELF E
Unit 15 cities
Period 91 : Reading
Date: ...........................A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary by matching
the column, decide True or False statements and answer the questionsB. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
II. Warm up Asks the Ss to work in groups and name
some cities in The USA which they
know
I. presentationII. Before you read:
Ask s to work in groups, look at the
picture, read the names of the places, then
match them and answer the questions
Vocabulary:
Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then show
the new words.
Explain new words:
Mingle (v) = mix
Metropolitan (adj) belong to the capitalfinance(v)
characterize(v)
Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus and
individually.
II. While you read:
Task 1: Matching A with BLets the Ss work in pairs, read the words in
column A and combine with the definitions
in column B.Goes around to help the Ss
Ask the Ss tell their answers
Task 2: T or F statements:
Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs
to choose T or F
Answers the teacher’s questions:
New York
Washington
Chicago
San Francisco……………………
Match the names with the places
Expected answers:
1 – a
2 – b
3 – d
4 - c
New York is a biog city in southeast USA
There is the Statue of Liberty in the
harbour.
Take notes and read the new words.
Read the column.
Combine A with B
Expected answers:
1 – d
2 – c
3 – e4 – a
5. – b
Read the text, work in pairs to decide T or
F
Unit 15 cities
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 168/189
Asks Ss to work in pairs and choose the best
choice for the statements.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks some SS to answer in front of the class.
Task 3 : Answering the questions:
Has the Ss read the reading passage, then
work in pairs to answer the questions:
T goes around class to help them.
T asks the Ss to tell their answer.
Give feedback.
III. After you read:
Ask the Ss to talk about New York.
Asks them to answer the questions:
If you could visit New York, which place(s)
of interest there would you like to see?
Why would you like to see it?
IV. homework: Summarize the reading passage.
Expected answers:
1. T
2. F (ice - free)
3. T
4. T
5. T
Read the reading passage, then work in pairs
to answer the questions
Expected answers:
1. In the Southern part of New York
state.
2. 7 million in the city and 19 million in
the whole metropolitan region.
3. Because it was found by the Dutch in1624.
4. Because it is the home of United
Nations, the centre of global finance,
communication and business.
5. The Statue of Liberty, the Empire
State Building, Wall Street, the
Broadway theatre district are attracted
to visitors.
Discuss the answer:
* I would like to see the Statue ofLiberty.
Because it is the symbol of The USA
* I would like to see the Empire State
Building
Because it is the first highest building in
the world.
I would like to see the Wall Street
Because it is the centre of the world’s
finance
Summarize the reading passage in notebook.
Prepare for new lesson: Speaking
Unit 15 cities
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 169/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 170/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Asks Ss to work in pairs and choose the best
choice for the statements.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks some SS to answer in front of the class.
Task 3 : Answering the questions:
Has the Ss read the reading passage, then
work in pairs to answer the questions:
T goes around class to help them.
T asks the Ss to tell their answer.
Give feedback.
After you read:
Ask the Ss to talk about New York.
Asks them to answer the questions:
If you could visit New York, which place(s)
of interest there would you like to see?Why would you like to see it?
III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.
Expected answers:
1. T
2. F (ice - free)
3. T
4. T5. T
Read the reading passage, then work in pairs
to answer the questions
Expected answers:
1. In the Southern part of New York
state.
2. 7 million in the city and 19 million in
the whole metropolitan region.3. Because it was found by the Dutch in
1624.
4. Because it is the home of United
Nations, the centre of global finance,
communication and business.
5. The Statue of Liberty, the Empire
State Building, Wall Street, the
Broadway theatre district are attracted
to visitors.
6. Discuss the answer:
* I would like to see the Statue of
Liberty.
Because it is the symbol of The USA
* I would like to see the Empire State
Building
Because it is the first highest building in
the world.
I would like to see the Wall Street
Because it is the centre of the world’s
finance
Summarize the reading passage in notebook.
Prepare for new lesson: Speaking
UNIT 15 CITIES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 171/189
UNIT 15 CITIES
Period 92 : Speaking Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to compare two
cities and state preferences and giving reasons.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Asks Ss to close their books and tell some
main information about New York
T leads in new lesson: Speaking
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1: Completing the sentences
Asks s to look at the book and work with
their partner.Complete the missing words,
using the given in column B
Asks some pairs to tell their answer.
Give feedback.
Task 2: Group work1. T asks some pairs to read aloud the
dialogue model.
T asks Ss to work in pairs.
The T asks the Ss to look at the column of
the two cities and use the information to
make diologue about them.
Goes around the class to gelp the Ss and
asks some pairs to tell their diologues in
front of the class.
Founded in 1624
People are friendly and open
Transport is convenient
Area is 946 square km.
Population is 7 million and total is 19
million.
Look at the column and complete the
sentences
Expected answers:
1. founded
2. transport
3. people
4. park
5. population
6. areaLook at the column.
Work in pairs to make dialogue about New
York and London, using the questions in
task 1 .
A. When was New York founed?
B. It was founded in 1624
A. And what about London?
B. It was founded in 43 AD
A. What is the population of New
York?B. It is 7 million people. And what
about the population of London?
A. It is 7 million, too.
B. What is the area of New York?
UNIT 15 CITIES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 172/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Task 3: Telling about the cities, using
comparisons:
Asks the Ss to read the example, then use theinformation in their diologues to tell about
the two cities, using comparisons.
Notes: Comparisons:
Comparative form: short adj + er
More + long adj
More + noun
Possitive form: as + adj + as
Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
T asks some pairs to tell their work in frontof the class.
Task 4: Telling about the cities you like
Asks the Ss to tell about which of the two
cities they like more and give the reason of
their ideas.Notes:
The structure to use:
I prefer ……. To……..
Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
T asks some pairs to tell their work in front
of the class.
Summary: Speaking practice
III. HOMEWORK:
Write task 4 in your notebook
Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the
sentences in listening lesson.
A. It is 946 square km. And what about
London?..............
Ss listen to the teacher.Read the example
Ss work in groups.
Ss make similar dialogues using the
information in their diologues.
1. Tell about National holidays
A. London has 14 national days, and
New York has 7 national days
B. Yes. So London has more national
days than New York
( New York has less national daysthan London)
2. Tell about parks
A. London has 5 big parks.
B. Yes. And New York has only one big
parks, so London has more parks than
New York
3. tell about people
A. The people in New York are friendly
and open
B. And the people in London areformal but they are more reversed.
Tell about the city they like more
I prefer London to New York because it has
less population
I prefer New York to London because it is
modern
I prefer New York to London because it has
more high building.
Write homework
UNIT 15 CITIES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 173/189
UNIT 15 CITIES
Period 93 : Listening Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and
understand the information about Pele, one of the most talanted fooballer in the world, fillin the chart and answer the questions about him
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UPT asks s to close the book and work in pairs
to name some famous places in New York.
T calls Ss to answer.
T lead-in listening lesson.
II. PRESENTATION
Before you listen:T asks s to open the book, work in group,
look at the picture and answer the
questions.
T gives questions and asks s to answer.
2. While you listen:
Task 1: Choosing the best andswerT asks the Ss to read the given information
carefully.
Has the Ss to listen to the tapes
T asks s to listen to the first timeT checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the second time
T checks Ss’ answer.
Ss work in pairs.
Empire State Building
The Statue of Liberty
The Home of UN
The Times Square
Look at the picture, work in group and
asnwer the questions
Expected answers:
1. It is the Statue of Liberty.
2. It is the statue of a woman
It is tall / big / beautiful
3. It’ s got a crown on its head
4. It ‘s got a tablet on its left hand5. It is holding a burning torch in its right
hand
It is wearing a robe
Listen to the tape
Choose the best answer
Say their answer in front of the class.
Expected answers:
1. b
2. 2. a3. 3. a
4. 4. a
5. 5. c
UNIT 15 CITIES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 174/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
T asks Ss to listen to the third time
T pauses to checks Ss’ answer.
Task 2: Filling the table
T gives situations and explains
T asks Ss to look at the tableHas the Ss to listen to complete it.
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the second time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the third time
Has the Ss to compare their answer with ther
friend’s answers.
The T asks some Ss to go to the blackboardto write their answers
Gives feedback.
3. After you listen :
T T asks Ss to to work in groups to discuss
and tell about the Statue of Liberty.
Summary:
Listening about the Statue of Liberty.
III. HOMEWORK: Listening about the Statue of Liberty.
Prepare for new lesson:
Check the answers
Read the table to find out what they have to
do.
Listen to the tapes
Complete the table
Expected answers:1. 46 m
2. 205 tons
3. cooper and iron frame
4. stone and concrete
5. 9.30 to 5p.m daily except
Christmas Day
Work in groups to compare the table.
Ss compare their answer with the classmate.
Correct their answers
Group work:
Discuss and tell about the Statue of Liberty.
Where is the Statue of Liberty?
When was it made?How is it?
Expected answer:
The Statue of Liberty is in New York
harbour. It was made by French in 1886 to
show their friendship with America. It is the
Statue of a woman who wears a robe and a
crown on her head. She hols a burning tourch
in her right hand and a table in her left hand.
Listening skill
Writing: Read the given information and
prepare for writing.
UNIT 15 CITIES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 175/189
UNIT 15 CITIES
Period 94 : Writing Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to use the
suggestions to write a description of a city or town in Viet nam
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Asks the Ss to work in group and match
the capital cities with the countries
II. PRESENTATION
Task1: Answer the questionsRead the passage and answer the questions.
T asks s to read the anouncement in their
book and answer the questions.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks the Ss to answer in front of the class.Correct information.
Notes:To write adescription ( of a city), there are
some main information to pay attention to.
Ask the Ss to look at the passage and give
their answers:
Site
Area ............
Listen to the Teacher
Work in group to combine.
Russia – Moscow
France – Paris
China – PekingThe USA – Washington
Italy – Roma
Austria – Viena
Great Britain – London
Read the passage in their book and answer
the questions.
Expected answers:1. In Suothern England, on the
Thames River.
2. 1610 square km
3. 7 million
4. The Capital of UK
5. By the Romans in 43AD
Discuss and give answer to the T’s
Questions
To be situated …
Cover an area of ……
UNIT 15 CITIES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 176/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Foudation
Fame
The Teacher makes question and asks the
Ss to answer them:
What city do you want to write about?
When was it found?
What is its population?Where is it situated?
What is its are?
What is it famous for?
Task 2: Write about a city .
1. Reading given information
2. The T asks the Ss to read the
information and answer the
questions
Asks the Ss to work in group.
T goes around the class to help themT calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to
write their letter on the board.
2. Writing
The T asks the Ss to work in group write
their announcements
Goes around the class to check and help
them to write correctly.
Asks two groups to write their writing on
the blackboard.
After you write:Ask Ss to exchange their writing to the
other groups to read and correct mistakes.
T chooses 2 writing posters to correct to
the class.
T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes and
gives marks
Summary: Write an announcement.
III. HOMEWORK: Write about the match between your
school football team and the New Stars
team
Prepare for new lesson: Language focus.
Be founded in / by……….
Be famous for …………..
Ss work in groups, answer the teacher’s
questions:
Da Lat
It was found by Yersin in 1807191644 people
Lam Vien Highland
39106 square km
It is famous for history buildings, natural
landscapes, weather…
Groupwork:
Discuss and Write a description about Da Lat.
Expected writing:Da Lat, which is the tourist city of Viet nam,
was founded by Yersin in 1807. It has a
population of 191644 people. It situated on lam
Vien Highland, and it covers the area of 39106
square km. Da Lat is famous for beautiful
natural landscapes such as Valley of Love,
Than Tho Lake, Langbian Mountain… It is also
famous for the weather. The weather is cool
round the year. Every visitors from places in
Viet nam and in the world come to enjoy itsbeautiful scences and weather.
Exchange writng with each others
Correct the friends’ writing
Write homework in the notebooks
Prepare for new lesson: Language focus
UNIT 15 CITIES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 177/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 178/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
T calls some Ss to read that sentences.
T corrects pronunciation.
2. Grammar
1. Non-defining and defining relative
clauses:The T asks the Ss to look at the examples
What structures are used?Why is there commars between the two
sentences?
Non-defining relative clauses:
- Proper Nouns
- Possessive adjective
- This / that
- Superilative comparison
Exercise1:
Asks s to use the correct tense of the given
words to complete the spacesGoes around the class to help the Ss
Checks and gives correct answers.
2.Contrsting connecting ideas: AlthoughThe T gives example
Have the Ss to describe anylize it
Exercise2.
Asks s to combine the sentence Goes
around class to help if possible.
Checks and gives correct answers.
Summary:Grammar:
The use of non-defining relative clause and
defining clause.
Although as a contrasting connetor.
III. HOMEWORK: Write the exercises in the notebooks.
Prepare for new lesson: Un 16, reading
Do as teacher request.
Work in group and discuss.
Expected answers:Relative clause
Proper Noun
Look at the exercise, work in pair to
complete the spaces
Expected answers:
1.Washington DC, which is located in the
East Coast of the USA, has many interestingand historical places to visit
2.Mexico City, which has a population of
20,000,000 people, is the largest
metropolictan in the world
3. Seoul, which ….Olympics, is well known
for its shopping.
Although + clause
= inspite of/ despite
Expected answers:1. Although there is not much to do in the
countryside, I prefer living in it.
2. Although there is a lot of population in
Los Angeles, it is an ideal place to live.
3. Although the shops are crowded, people
are not buying much.
4. Although the city is a famous destination,
it has its problems.
5. Although it is a safe neighbour, it is best
to be careful
Repeat main structure.
Prepare for test
UNIT 15 CITIES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 179/189
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES
Period 96 : Reading Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Students will be able to understand vocabulary and
expressions in context about Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam, decide True or False statements.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Asks the Ss to work in groups and name
some famous historical places in Ha
Noi.
II. PRESENTATION
Before you read:The T shows some pictures
Ask Ss to work in groups, look at the
picture, read the names of the answer the
questions
Vocabulary:
Have the Ss to listen to the tape, then show
the new words.
Explain new words:
Present (v)
Presentative(adj)Memorialize (v) -> memory
engrave(v)
stelae(n)
witnessed
Asks the Ss to read the words in chorus and
individually.
While you read:
Task 1: Finding the synonyms
Lets the Ss work in pairs, read the words insentences and find the synonyms for them.
Goes around to help the Ss
Ask the Ss tell their answers
Answers the teacher’s questions:
Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam
Ho Guom
Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum
……………………
Match the names with the placesExpected answers:
1 banyan
2 confusius
3 a tortoise
4 a comer in royal examination
Take notes and read the new words.
Pairwork:
Read the sentences, them find the
synonymsCompare the answers with friends.
Expected answers:
a. initially
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 180/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Gives feedback
Corrects the mistakes
Task 2: T or F statements:
Asks Ss to scan the text, then work in pairs.
Asks Ss to work in pairs and choose the best
choice for the statements.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks some SS to answer in front of the class.
After you read:Ask the Ss to talk about Van Mieu Quoc Tu
Giam
Pairwork: Ask and answer
Ex: Why is Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam a place
of interest?
Because it is a famous historical and cultural
place. It was arepresentive of Confucial way
of thought and behavior.
Has the Ss to practice in pairs.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
Asks some pairs to answer in front of the
class.
Give feedback
Has the Ss to summarize the reading passage.
III. HOMEWORK: Summarize the reading passage.
b. typical
c. honor
d. carved
e. grow well
Scan the text, then work in pair to decide T
or F.Expected answers:
1. F in 1076
2. T
3. F 11-> 18 century
4. F well preserved
5. T
6. T
Read the reading passage, then work in pairsto answer the questions
1.
2. In 1076 in Ly Dinastry, Ha Noi.
3. Educating talanted men and memorilizing
the most brilliant scholar.
4. Name, the place of birth and the
achievement of the first comers in the Royal
examination
Summarize the reading passage
Summarize the reading passage in notebook.
Prepare for new lesson: Speaking
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 181/189
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES
Period 92 : Speaking Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
1. Educational aims: By the end of the lesson students will be able to compare two
cities and state preferences and giving reasons.
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I.WARM UP
Asks Ss to close their books and tell some
main information about New York
T leads in new lesson: Speaking
II. PRESENTATION
Task 1: Completing the sentences
Asks s to look at the book and work with
their partner.Complete the missing words,
using the given in column B
Asks some pairs to tell their answer.
Give feedback.
Task 2: Group work1. T asks some pairs to read aloud the
dialogue model.
T asks Ss to work in pairs.
The T asks the Ss to look at the column of
the two cities and use the information to
make diologue about them.
Goes around the class to gelp the Ss and
asks some pairs to tell their diologues in
front of the class.
Founded in 1624
People are friendly and open
Transport is convenient
Area is 946 square km.
Population is 7 million and total is 19
million.
Look at the column and complete the
sentences.
Expected answers:
1. founded
2. transport
3. people
4. park
5. population6. area
Look at the column.
Work in pairs to make dialogue about New
York and London, using the questions in
task 1 .
A. When was New York founed?
B. It was founded in 1624
A. And what about London?
B. It was founded in 43 AD
A. What is the population of NewYork?
B. It is 7 million people. And what
about the population of London?
A. It is 7 million, too.
B. What is the area of New York?
C. UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES
Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 182/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Task 3: Telling about the cities, using
comparisons:Asks the Ss to read the example, then use the
information in their diologues to tell aboutthe two cities, using comparisons.
Notes: Comparisons:
Comparative form: short adj + er
More + long adj
More + noun
Possitive form: as + adj + as
Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
T asks some pairs to tell their work in frontof the class.
Task 4: Telling about the cities you like
Asks the Ss to tell about which of the two
cities they like more and give the reason of
their ideas.
Notes:
The structure to use:
I prefer ……. To……..
Asks the Ss to practise in pairs.
Goes around the class to help the Ss.
T asks some pairs to tell their work in front
of the class.
Summary: Speaking practice
III. HOMEWORK: Write task 4 in your
notebook
Prepare for new lesson: Listening: Read the
sentences in listening lesson.
A. It is 946 square km. And what about
London?..............
Ss listen to the teacher.
Read the exampleSs work in groups.
Ss make similar dialogues using the
information in their diologues.
1. Tell about National holidays
A. London has 14 national days, and
New York has 7 national days
B. Yes. So London has more national
days than New York
( New York has less national days
than London)2. Tell about parks
A. London has 5 big parks.
B. Yes. And New York has only one big
parks, so London has more parks than
New York
3. tell about people
A. The people in New York are friendly
and open
B. And the people in London are
formal but they are more reversed.
Tell about the city they like more
I prefer London to New York because it has
less population
I prefer New York to London because it is
modern
I prefer New York to London because it has
more high building.
Write homework
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 183/189
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES
Period 93 : Listening Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:
By the end of the lesson, the Student will be able to listen and
understand the information about Pele, one of the most talanted fooballer in the world, fill
in the chart and answer the questions about him
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UPT asks s to close the book and work in pairs
to name some famous places in New York.
T calls Ss to answer.T lead-in listening lesson.
II. PRESENTATION
Before you listen:
T asks s to open the book, work in group,
look at the picture and answer the
questions.
T gives questions and asks s to answer.
2. While you listen:
Task 1: Choosing the best andswer
T asks the Ss to read the given information
carefully.
Has the Ss to listen to the tapes
T asks s to listen to the first time
T checks Ss’ answer.T asks Ss to listen to the second time
T checks Ss’ answer.
Ss work in pairs.
Empire State Building
The Statue of Liberty
The Home of UNThe Times Square
Look at the picture, work in group and
asnwer the questions
Expected answers:
1. It is the Statue of Liberty.
2. It is the statue of a woman
It is tall / big / beautiful
3. It’ s got a crown on its head4. It ‘s got a tablet on its left hand
5. It is holding a burning torch in its right
hand
It is wearing a robe
Listen to the tape
Choose the best answer
Say their answer in front of the class.
Expected answers:
1. b2. 2. a
3. 3. a
4. 4. a
5. 5. c
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 184/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
T asks Ss to listen to the third time
T pauses to checks Ss’ answer.
Task 2: Filling the table
T gives situations and explains
T asks Ss to look at the tableHas the Ss to listen to complete it.
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the second time
T checks Ss’ answer.
T asks Ss to listen to the third time
Has the Ss to compare their answer with ther
friend’s answers.
The T asks some Ss to go to the blackboardto write their answers
Gives feedback.
3. After you listen :
T T asks Ss to to work in groups to discuss
and tell about the Statue of Liberty.
Summary:
Listening about the Statue of Liberty.
III. HOMEWORK: Listening about the Statue of Liberty.
Prepare for new lesson:
Check the answers
Read the table to find out what they have to
do.
Listen to the tapes
Complete the table
Expected answers:
1. 46 m
2. 205 tons
3. cooper and iron frame
4. stone and concrete
5. 9.30 to 5p.m daily except
Christmas Day
Work in groups to compare the table.
Ss compare their answer with the classmate.
Correct their answers
Group work:
Discuss and tell about the Statue of Liberty.
Where is the Statue of Liberty?
Why was it made?
How is it?
Expected answer:
The Statue of Liberty is in New York
harbour. It was made by French in 1886 to
show their friendship with America. It is the
Statue of a woman who wears a robe and a
crown on her head. She hols a burning tourch
in her right hand and a table in her left hand.
Listening skill
Writing: Read the given information and
prepare for writing.
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 185/189
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 186/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
Foudation
Fame
The Teacher makes question and asks the
Ss to answer them:
What city do you want to write about?
When was it found?
What is its population?Where is it situated?
What is its are?
What is it famous for?
Task 2: Write about a city .1. Reading given information
2. The T asks the Ss to read the
information and answer the
questions.
Asks the Ss to work in group.
T goes around the class to help them
T calls 2 representatives of 2 groups to
write their letter on the board.
2. Writing
The T asks the Ss to work in group write
their announcements
Goes around the class to check and help
them to write correctly.Asks two groups to write their writing on
the blackboard.
After you write:
Ask Ss to exchange their writing to the
other groups to read and correct mistakes.
T chooses 2 writing posters to correct to
the class.
T asks the Ss to corrects the mistakes and
gives marks
Summary: Write an announcement.
III. HOMEWORK: Write about the
match between your school football team
and the New Stars team
Prepare for new lesson: Language focus.
Be founded in / by……….
Be famous for …………..
Ss work in groups, answer the teacher’s
questions:
Da Lat
It was found by Yersin in 1807191644 people
Lam Vien Highland
39106 square km
It is famous for history buildings, natural
landscapes, weather…
Groupwork:
Discuss and Write a description about Da Lat.
Expected writing:Da Lat, which is the tourist city of Viet nam,
was founded by Yersin in 1807. It has a
population of 191644 people. It situated on lam
Vien Highland, and it covers the area of 39106
square km. Da Lat is famous for beautiful
natural landscapes such as Valley of Love,
Than Tho Lake, Langbian Mountain… It is also
famous for the weather. The weather is cool
round the year. Every visitors from places in
Viet nam and in the world come to enjoy itsbeautiful scences and weather.
Exchange writng with each others
Correct the friends’ writing
Write homework in the notebooks
Prepare for new lesson: Language focus
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 187/189
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES
Period 95 : Language focus Date: ...........................
A. OBJECTIVE:Educational aims:By the end of the lesson students will be able torecognize,
understand and pronounce two sounds:/ / and / /, review the use of non-defining and
defining relative clause and althoughas a contrasting connector
B. METHODS: Intergraded, mainly communicative approaching.
C. TEACHING AIDS: Pictures, poster, handouts and real objects.
D. PROCEDURE:
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
I. WARM UP
Listen to the T and put the words in correct
group:
Mother father this brother thinThan thing thick
Lead to new lesson.
II. PRESENTATION
1. Pronunciation
T presents 2 sounds / /, / /
1. Has th Ss open their books
Turns on the cassette for Ss to listen to two
consonants / / and / /.
Asks them to repeat
Asks some Ss to read
corrects if they can’t pronounce clearly
between / / and / /.
2. Lets them work in pair and practice six
sentences in the book.
Help s read them correctly word by word and
then read the whole sentence.
3. Practice these sentences.
T asks Ss to listen and pick out the words
containing the sound / /, / /
S listen to the T and answer.
Mother thin
Father thickBrother thing
Than
this
The sounds / / and / /
Listen to the tape and repeat.
Stand up and read.
Pay attention to the teacher
Ss work in pairs
Practice all those sentencesRead word by word and then read whole
sentence.
S listen and repeat the words
Pick out them
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 188/189
TEACHER'S ACTIVITIES STUDENTS' ACTIVITIES
T calls some Ss to read that sentences.
T corrects pronunciation.
2. Grammar
1. Non-defining and defining relative
clauses:The T asks the Ss to look at the examples
What structures are used?Why is there commars between the two
sentences?
Non-defining relative clauses:
- Proper Nouns
- Possessive adjective
- This / that
- Superilative comparison
Exercise1:
Asks s to use the correct tense of the given
words to complete the spacesGoes around the class to help the Ss
Checks and gives correct answers.
2.Contrsting connecting ideas: AlthoughThe T gives example
Have the Ss to describe anylize it
Exercise2.
Asks s to combine the sentence Goes
around class to help if possible.
Checks and gives correct answers.
Summary:Grammar:
The use of non-defining relative clause and
defining clause.
Although as a contrasting connetor.
III. HOMEWORK: Write the exercises in the notebooks.
Prepare for new lesson: Un 16, reading
Do as teacher request.
Work in group and discuss.
Expected answers:Relative clause
Proper Noun
Look at the exercise, work in pair to
complete the spaces
Expected answers:
1.Washington DC, which is located in the
East Coast of the USA, has many interestingand historical places to visit
2.Mexico City, which has a population of
20,000,000 people, is the largest
metropolictan in the world
3. Seoul, which ….Olympics, is well known
for its shopping.
Although + clause
= inspite of/ despite
Expected answers:1. Although there is not much to do in the
countryside, I prefer living in it.
2. Although there is a lot of population in
Los Angeles, it is an ideal place to live.
3. Although the shops are crowded, people
are not buying much.
4. Although the city is a famous destination,
it has its problems.
5. Although it is a safe neighbour, it is best
to be careful
Repeat main structure.
Prepare for test
UNIT 16 HISTORICAL PLACES Giáo án Tiế ng Anh 10 - Nguyễ n Thị Thanh Huyề n Tr ườ ng THPT Đồng Hói
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com
8/13/2019 Giáo Án Tiếng Anh 10 Tác giả: Nguyễn Thị Thanh Huyền (gd) Nguồn gốc: Trường THPT Đồng Hới, 2008
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/giao-an-tieng-anh-10-tac-gia-nguyen-thi-thanh-huyen-gd-nguon 189/189
www.daykemquynhon.ucoz.com